52342523ed3372bf2c9bb5aec9db443eb99c870b
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set CSKY
25 @set H8300
26 @set HPPA
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set PDP11
35 @set POWERPC
36 @set POWERPC64
37 @set Renesas
38 @set S/390
39 @set SPU
40 @set TICOFF
41 @set WIN32
42 @set XTENSA
43 @end ifset
44 @c man end
45
46 @ifnottex
47 @dircategory Software development
48 @direntry
49 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
50 @end direntry
51 @end ifnottex
52
53 @copying
54 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
55 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
56 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
57 @end ifset
58 version @value{VERSION}.
59
60 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
61
62 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
63 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
64 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
65 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
66 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
67 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
68 @end copying
69 @iftex
70 @finalout
71 @setchapternewpage odd
72 @settitle The GNU linker
73 @titlepage
74 @title The GNU linker
75 @sp 1
76 @subtitle @code{ld}
77 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
78 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
79 @end ifset
80 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
81 @author Steve Chamberlain
82 @author Ian Lance Taylor
83 @page
84
85 @tex
86 {\parskip=0pt
87 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
88 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
89 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
90 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
91 }
92 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
93 @end tex
94
95 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
96 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
97 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
98
99 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
100 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
101 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
102 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
103 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
104 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
105 @c man end
106
107 @end titlepage
108 @end iftex
109 @contents
110 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
111
112 @ifnottex
113 @node Top
114 @top LD
115 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
116 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
117 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
118 @end ifset
119 version @value{VERSION}.
120
121 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
122 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
123 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
124
125 @menu
126 * Overview:: Overview
127 * Invocation:: Invocation
128 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
129 @ifset GENERIC
130 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
131 @end ifset
132 @ifclear GENERIC
133 @ifset H8300
134 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
135 @end ifset
136 @ifset Renesas
137 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
138 @end ifset
139 @ifset ARM
140 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
141 @end ifset
142 @ifset M68HC11
143 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
144 @end ifset
145 @ifset HPPA
146 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
147 @end ifset
148 @ifset M68K
149 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
150 @end ifset
151 @ifset MIPS
152 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
153 @end ifset
154 @ifset POWERPC
155 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
156 @end ifset
157 @ifset POWERPC64
158 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
159 @end ifset
160 @ifset S/390
161 * S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
162 @end ifset
163 @ifset SPU
164 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
165 @end ifset
166 @ifset TICOFF
167 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
168 @end ifset
169 @ifset WIN32
170 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
171 @end ifset
172 @ifset XTENSA
173 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
174 @end ifset
175 @end ifclear
176 @ifclear SingleFormat
177 * BFD:: BFD
178 @end ifclear
179 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
180
181 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
182 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
183 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
184 * LD Index:: LD Index
185 @end menu
186 @end ifnottex
187
188 @node Overview
189 @chapter Overview
190
191 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
192 @cindex what is this?
193
194 @ifset man
195 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
196 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
197 @c man end
198
199 @c man begin SEEALSO
200 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
201 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
202 @file{ld}.
203 @c man end
204 @end ifset
205
206 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
207
208 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
209 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
210 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
211
212 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
213 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
214 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
215
216 @ifset man
217 @c For the man only
218 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
219 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
220 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
221 @end ifset
222
223 @ifclear SingleFormat
224 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
225 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
226 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
227 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
228 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
229 @end ifclear
230
231 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
232 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
233 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
234 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
235 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
236
237 @c man end
238
239 @node Invocation
240 @chapter Invocation
241
242 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
243
244 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
245 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
246 you have many choices to control its behavior.
247
248 @c man end
249
250 @ifset UsesEnvVars
251 @menu
252 * Options:: Command-line Options
253 * Environment:: Environment Variables
254 @end menu
255
256 @node Options
257 @section Command-line Options
258 @end ifset
259
260 @cindex command line
261 @cindex options
262
263 @c man begin OPTIONS
264
265 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
266 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
267 @cindex standard Unix system
268 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
269 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
270 link a file @code{hello.o}:
271
272 @smallexample
273 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
274 @end smallexample
275
276 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
277 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
278 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
279 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
280
281 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
282 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
283 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
284 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
285 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
286 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
287 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
288 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
289 noted in the descriptions below.
290
291 @cindex object files
292 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
293 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
294 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
295 an option and its argument.
296
297 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
298 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
299 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
300 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
301 message @samp{No input files}.
302
303 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
304 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
305 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
306 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
307 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
308 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
309 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
310 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
311 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
312 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
313 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
314
315 For options whose names are a single letter,
316 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
317 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
318 option that requires them.
319
320 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
321 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
322 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
323 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
324 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
325 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
326 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
327 output.
328
329 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
330 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
331 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
332 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
333 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
334 accepted.
335
336 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
337 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
338 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
339 compiler driver) like this:
340
341 @smallexample
342 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
343 @end smallexample
344
345 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
346 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
347 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
348 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
349 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
350 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
351 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
352
353 @smallexample
354 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
355 @end smallexample
356
357 Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
358 linker:
359
360 @table @gcctabopt
361 @include at-file.texi
362
363 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
364 @item -a @var{keyword}
365 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
366 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
367 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
368 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
369 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
370
371 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
373 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
374 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
375 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
376 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
377 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
378 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
379 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
380 interface.
381
382 @ifclear SingleFormat
383 @cindex binary input format
384 @kindex -b @var{format}
385 @kindex --format=@var{format}
386 @cindex input format
387 @cindex input format
388 @item -b @var{input-format}
389 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
390 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
391 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
392 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
393 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
394 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
395 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
396 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
397 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
398 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
399 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
400 @xref{BFD}.
401
402 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
403 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
404 linking object files of different formats), by including
405 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
406 particular format.
407
408 The default format is taken from the environment variable
409 @code{GNUTARGET}.
410 @ifset UsesEnvVars
411 @xref{Environment}.
412 @end ifset
413 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
414 @code{TARGET};
415 @ifclear man
416 see @ref{Format Commands}.
417 @end ifclear
418 @end ifclear
419
420 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
421 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
422 @cindex compatibility, MRI
423 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
424 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
425 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
426 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
427 @ifclear man
428 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
429 @end ifclear
430 @ifset man
431 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
432 @end ifset
433 Introduce MRI script files with
434 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
435 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
436 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
437 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
438
439 @cindex common allocation
440 @kindex -d
441 @kindex -dc
442 @kindex -dp
443 @item -d
444 @itemx -dc
445 @itemx -dp
446 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
447 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
448 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
449 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
450 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
451
452 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
453 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
454 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
455 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
456 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
457 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
458 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
459 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
460 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
461 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
462
463 @kindex --enable-non-contiguous-regions
464 @item --enable-non-contiguous-regions
465 This option avoids generating an error if an input section does not
466 fit a matching output section. The linker tries to allocate the input
467 section to subseque nt matching output sections, and generates an
468 error only if no output section is large enough. This is useful when
469 several non-contiguous memory regions are available and the input
470 section does not require a particular one. The order in which input
471 sections are evaluated does not change, for instance:
472
473 @smallexample
474 MEMORY @{
475 MEM1 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x14
476 MEM2 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x40
477 MEM3 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x2000, LENGTH = 0x40
478 @}
479 SECTIONS @{
480 mem1 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM1
481 mem2 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM2
482 mem3 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM2
483 @}
484
485 with input sections:
486 .data.1: size 8
487 .data.2: size 0x10
488 .data.3: size 4
489
490 results in .data.1 affected to mem1, and .data.2 and .data.3
491 affected to mem2, even though .data.3 would fit in mem3.
492 @end smallexample
493
494 This option is incompatible with INSERT statements because it changes
495 the way input sections are mapped to output sections.
496
497 @kindex --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings
498 @item --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings
499 This option enables warnings when
500 @code{--enable-non-contiguous-regions} allows possibly unexpected
501 matches in sections mapping, potentially leading to silently
502 discarding a section instead of failing because it does not fit any
503 output region.
504
505 @cindex entry point, from command line
506 @kindex -e @var{entry}
507 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
508 @item -e @var{entry}
509 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
510 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
511 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
512 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
513 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
514 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
515 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
516 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
517
518 @kindex --exclude-libs
519 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
520 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
521 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
522 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
523 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
524 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
525 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
526 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
527 be treated as hidden.
528
529 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
530 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
531 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
532 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
533 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
534 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
535 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
536 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
537 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
538 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
539 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
540 regardless of this option.
541
542 @cindex dynamic symbol table
543 @kindex -E
544 @kindex --export-dynamic
545 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
546 @item -E
547 @itemx --export-dynamic
548 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
549 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
550 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
551 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
552 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
553
554 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
555 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
556 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
557 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
558
559 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
560 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
561 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
562 linking the program itself.
563
564 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
565 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
566 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
567
568 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
569 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
570 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
571
572 @ifclear SingleFormat
573 @cindex big-endian objects
574 @cindex endianness
575 @kindex -EB
576 @item -EB
577 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
578
579 @cindex little-endian objects
580 @kindex -EL
581 @item -EL
582 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
583 @end ifclear
584
585 @kindex -f @var{name}
586 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
587 @item -f @var{name}
588 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
589 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
590 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
591 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
592 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
593
594 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
595 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
596 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
597 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
598 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
599 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
600 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
601 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
602 machine-specific performance.
603
604 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
605 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
606
607 @kindex -F @var{name}
608 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
609 @item -F @var{name}
610 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
611 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
612 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
613 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
614 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
615
616 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
617 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
618 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
619 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
620 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
621 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
622 @var{name}.
623
624 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
625 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
626 object files.
627 @ifclear SingleFormat
628 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
629 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
630 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
631 environment variable.
632 @end ifclear
633 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
634 creating an ELF shared object.
635
636 @cindex finalization function
637 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
638 @item -fini=@var{name}
639 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
640 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
641 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
642 the function to call.
643
644 @kindex -g
645 @item -g
646 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
647
648 @kindex -G @var{value}
649 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
650 @cindex object size
651 @item -G @var{value}
652 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
653 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
654 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
655 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
656 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
657
658 @cindex runtime library name
659 @kindex -h @var{name}
660 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
661 @item -h @var{name}
662 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
663 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
664 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
665 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
666 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
667 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
668
669 @kindex -i
670 @cindex incremental link
671 @item -i
672 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
673
674 @cindex initialization function
675 @kindex -init=@var{name}
676 @item -init=@var{name}
677 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
678 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
679 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
680 function to call.
681
682 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
683 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
684 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
685 @item -l @var{namespec}
686 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
687 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
688 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
689 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
690 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
691 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
692
693 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
694 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
695 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
696 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
697 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
698 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
699 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
700 @var{filename}.
701
702 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
703 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
704 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
705 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
706 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
707 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
708
709 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
710 archives multiple times.
711
712 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
713
714 @ifset GENERIC
715 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
716 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
717 behaviour of the AIX linker.
718 @end ifset
719
720 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
721 @kindex -L @var{dir}
722 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
723 @item -L @var{searchdir}
724 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
725 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
726 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
727 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
728 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
729 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
730 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
731 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
732 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
733 option is specified.
734
735 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
736 prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
737 @samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
738
739 @ifset UsesEnvVars
740 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
741 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
742 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
743 @end ifset
744
745 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
746 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
747 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
748
749 @cindex emulation
750 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
751 @item -m @var{emulation}
752 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
753 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
754
755 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
756 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
757
758 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
759 configured.
760
761 @cindex link map
762 @kindex -M
763 @kindex --print-map
764 @item -M
765 @itemx --print-map
766 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
767 information about the link, including the following:
768
769 @itemize @bullet
770 @item
771 Where object files are mapped into memory.
772 @item
773 How common symbols are allocated.
774 @item
775 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
776 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
777 @item
778 The values assigned to symbols.
779
780 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
781 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
782 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
783 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
784 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
785 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
786 linker script containing:
787
788 @smallexample
789 foo = 1
790 foo = foo * 4
791 foo = foo + 8
792 @end smallexample
793
794 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
795 option is used:
796
797 @smallexample
798 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
799 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
800 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
801 @end smallexample
802
803 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
804 scripts.
805
806 @item
807 How GNU properties are merged.
808
809 When the linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
810 .note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated.
811 These actions are reported in the link map. For example:
812
813 @smallexample
814 Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
815 @end smallexample
816
817 This indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
818 merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
819 is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
820
821 @smallexample
822 Updated property 0xc0010001 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
823 @end smallexample
824
825 This indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
826 when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
827 is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
828 @end itemize
829
830 @cindex link map discarded
831 @kindex --print-map-discarded
832 @kindex --no-print-map-discarded
833 @item --print-map-discarded
834 @itemx --no-print-map-discarded
835 Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
836 in the link map. Enabled by default.
837
838 @kindex -n
839 @cindex read-only text
840 @cindex NMAGIC
841 @kindex --nmagic
842 @item -n
843 @itemx --nmagic
844 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
845 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
846 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
847
848 @kindex -N
849 @kindex --omagic
850 @cindex read/write from cmd line
851 @cindex OMAGIC
852 @item -N
853 @itemx --omagic
854 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
855 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
856 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
857 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
858 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
859 specification published by Microsoft.
860
861 @kindex --no-omagic
862 @cindex OMAGIC
863 @item --no-omagic
864 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
865 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
866 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
867 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
868
869 @kindex -o @var{output}
870 @kindex --output=@var{output}
871 @cindex naming the output file
872 @item -o @var{output}
873 @itemx --output=@var{output}
874 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
875 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
876 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
877
878 @kindex -O @var{level}
879 @cindex generating optimized output
880 @item -O @var{level}
881 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
882 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
883 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
884 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
885 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
886 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
887 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
888
889 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
890 @item -plugin @var{name}
891 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
892 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
893 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
894 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
895 wish.
896
897 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
898 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
899 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
900 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
901 copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
902 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
903 just copy in the newest one.
904
905 @kindex --push-state
906 @cindex push state governing input file handling
907 @item --push-state
908 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
909 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
910 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
911
912 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
913 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
914 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
915 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
916 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
917 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
918
919 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
920 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
921 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
922 something as follows:
923
924 @smallexample
925 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
926 @end smallexample
927
928 @kindex --pop-state
929 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
930 @item --pop-state
931 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
932 flags governing input file handling.
933
934 @kindex -q
935 @kindex --emit-relocs
936 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
937 @item -q
938 @itemx --emit-relocs
939 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
940 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
941 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
942 in larger executables.
943
944 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
945
946 @kindex --force-dynamic
947 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
948 @item --force-dynamic
949 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
950 to VxWorks targets.
951
952 @cindex partial link
953 @cindex relocatable output
954 @kindex -r
955 @kindex --relocatable
956 @item -r
957 @itemx --relocatable
958 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
959 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
960 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
961 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
962 @code{OMAGIC}.
963 @c ; see @option{-N}.
964 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
965 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
966 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
967
968 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
969 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
970 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
971 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
972 with input files in other formats at all.
973
974 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
975
976 @kindex -R @var{file}
977 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
978 @cindex symbol-only input
979 @item -R @var{filename}
980 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
981 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
982 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
983 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
984 programs. You may use this option more than once.
985
986 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
987 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
988 the @option{-rpath} option.
989
990 @kindex -s
991 @kindex --strip-all
992 @cindex strip all symbols
993 @item -s
994 @itemx --strip-all
995 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
996
997 @kindex -S
998 @kindex --strip-debug
999 @cindex strip debugger symbols
1000 @item -S
1001 @itemx --strip-debug
1002 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
1003
1004 @kindex --strip-discarded
1005 @kindex --no-strip-discarded
1006 @item --strip-discarded
1007 @itemx --no-strip-discarded
1008 Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
1009 Enabled by default.
1010
1011 @kindex -t
1012 @kindex --trace
1013 @cindex input files, displaying
1014 @item -t
1015 @itemx --trace
1016 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
1017 @samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
1018 @samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
1019 and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
1020 a linker bug report.
1021
1022 @kindex -T @var{script}
1023 @kindex --script=@var{script}
1024 @cindex script files
1025 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
1026 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
1027 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
1028 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
1029 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
1030 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
1031 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
1032 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
1033 options accumulate.
1034
1035 @kindex -dT @var{script}
1036 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
1037 @cindex script files
1038 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
1039 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
1040 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
1041
1042 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
1043 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
1044 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
1045 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
1046 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
1047 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
1048 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
1049 @samp{gcc}).
1050
1051 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
1052 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1053 @cindex undefined symbol
1054 @item -u @var{symbol}
1055 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1056 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1057 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1058 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1059 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1060 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1061
1062 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1063 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1064 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1065 instead.
1066
1067 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1068 @cindex symbols, require defined
1069 @cindex defined symbol
1070 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1071 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1072 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1073 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1074 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1075 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1076 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1077
1078 @kindex -Ur
1079 @cindex constructors
1080 @item -Ur
1081 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1082 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1083 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1084 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1085 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1086 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1087 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1088 @samp{-r} for the others.
1089
1090 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1091 @cindex orphan sections
1092 @cindex sections, orphan
1093 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1094 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1095 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1096
1097 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1098
1099 @table @code
1100 @item place
1101 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1102 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1103 @samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
1104
1105 @item discard
1106 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1107 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1108
1109 @item warn
1110 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1111 issue a warning.
1112
1113 @item error
1114 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1115 @end table
1116
1117 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1118
1119 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1120 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1121 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1122 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1123 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1124 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1125 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1126 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1127 in a linker script.
1128
1129 @kindex -v
1130 @kindex -V
1131 @kindex --version
1132 @cindex version
1133 @item -v
1134 @itemx --version
1135 @itemx -V
1136 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1137 lists the supported emulations.
1138
1139 @kindex -x
1140 @kindex --discard-all
1141 @cindex deleting local symbols
1142 @item -x
1143 @itemx --discard-all
1144 Delete all local symbols.
1145
1146 @kindex -X
1147 @kindex --discard-locals
1148 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1149 @item -X
1150 @itemx --discard-locals
1151 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1152 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1153 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1154
1155 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1156 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1157 @cindex symbol tracing
1158 @item -y @var{symbol}
1159 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1160 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1161 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1162 to prepend an underscore.
1163
1164 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1165 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1166
1167 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1168 @item -Y @var{path}
1169 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1170 for Solaris compatibility.
1171
1172 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1173 @item -z @var{keyword}
1174 The recognized keywords are:
1175 @table @samp
1176
1177 @item bndplt
1178 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1179
1180 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1181 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1182 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1183 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1184 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1185 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1186 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1187 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1188 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1189 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1190 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1191
1192 @item cet-report=none
1193 @itemx cet-report=warning
1194 @itemx cet-report=error
1195 Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
1196 GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
1197 section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
1198 linker not report missing properties in input files.
1199 @option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
1200 missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
1201 the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
1202 Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
1203 GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
1204 turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
1205 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1206
1207 @item combreloc
1208 @itemx nocombreloc
1209 Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1210 dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
1211
1212 @item common
1213 @itemx nocommon
1214 Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1215 link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1216
1217 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1218 Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1219 layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1220 using pages of this size.
1221
1222 @item defs
1223 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1224 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1225 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
1226
1227 @item dynamic-undefined-weak
1228 @itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1229 Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1230 if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1231 by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1232 @samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1233 may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1234 selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1235 these options.
1236
1237 @item execstack
1238 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1239
1240 @item global
1241 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1242 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1243 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1244
1245 @item globalaudit
1246 This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1247 This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1248 setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1249 tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1250 the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
1251 all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
1252
1253 @item ibtplt
1254 Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1255 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1256
1257 @item ibt
1258 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1259 to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1260 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1261
1262 @item initfirst
1263 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1264 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1265 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1266 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1267 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1268 objects.
1269
1270 @item interpose
1271 Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1272 so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1273 libraries not so marked.
1274
1275 @item lazy
1276 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1277 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1278 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1279 Lazy binding is the default.
1280
1281 @item loadfltr
1282 Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
1283
1284 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1285 Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
1286
1287 @item muldefs
1288 Allow multiple definitions.
1289
1290 @item nocopyreloc
1291 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1292 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1293
1294 @item nodefaultlib
1295 Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1296 should ignore any default library search paths.
1297
1298 @item nodelete
1299 Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1300
1301 @item nodlopen
1302 Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
1303
1304 @item nodump
1305 Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1306
1307 @item noexecstack
1308 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1309
1310 @item noextern-protected-data
1311 Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1312 library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1313 used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1314 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1315 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1316 i386 and x86-64.
1317
1318 @item noreloc-overflow
1319 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1320 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1321 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1322
1323 @item now
1324 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1325 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1326 when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1327 function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1328 called.
1329
1330 @item origin
1331 Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
1332
1333 @item relro
1334 @itemx norelro
1335 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1336 specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1337 relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1338 than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
1339 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
1340
1341 @item separate-code
1342 @itemx noseparate-code
1343 Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1344 specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1345 be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1346 code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1347
1348 @item shstk
1349 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1350 to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1351 Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1352
1353 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1354 Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1355 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1356 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1357
1358 @item text
1359 @itemx notext
1360 @itemx textoff
1361 Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the position-independent
1362 or shared object has dynamic relocations in read-only sections. Don't
1363 report an error if @samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
1364
1365 @item undefs
1366 Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1367 either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1368 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1369
1370 @end table
1371
1372 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1373
1374 @kindex -(
1375 @cindex groups of archives
1376 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1377 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1378 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1379 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1380
1381 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1382 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1383 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1384 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1385 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1386 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1387 they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1388 resolved.
1389
1390 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1391 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1392 more archives.
1393
1394 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1395 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1396 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1397 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1398 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1399 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1400 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1401 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1402 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1403 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1404 restore the old behaviour.
1405
1406 @kindex --as-needed
1407 @kindex --no-as-needed
1408 @item --as-needed
1409 @itemx --no-as-needed
1410 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1411 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1412 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1413 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1414 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1415 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1416 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1417 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1418 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1419 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1420 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1421 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1422 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1423
1424 @kindex --add-needed
1425 @kindex --no-add-needed
1426 @item --add-needed
1427 @itemx --no-add-needed
1428 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1429 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1430 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1431 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1432
1433 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1434 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1435 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1436
1437 @kindex -Bdynamic
1438 @kindex -dy
1439 @kindex -call_shared
1440 @item -Bdynamic
1441 @itemx -dy
1442 @itemx -call_shared
1443 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1444 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1445 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1446 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1447 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1448 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1449
1450 @kindex -Bgroup
1451 @item -Bgroup
1452 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1453 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1454 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1455 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1456 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1457
1458 @kindex -Bstatic
1459 @kindex -dn
1460 @kindex -non_shared
1461 @kindex -static
1462 @item -Bstatic
1463 @itemx -dn
1464 @itemx -non_shared
1465 @itemx -static
1466 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1467 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1468 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1469 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1470 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1471 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1472 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1473 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1474 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1475 libraries.
1476
1477 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1478 @item -Bsymbolic
1479 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1480 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1481 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1482 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1483 platforms which support shared libraries.
1484
1485 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1486 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1487 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1488 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1489 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1490 libraries.
1491
1492 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1493 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1494 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1495 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1496 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1497 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1498 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1499 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1500 which support shared libraries.
1501
1502 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1503 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1504
1505 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1506 @item --dynamic-list-data
1507 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1508
1509 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1510 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1511 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1512 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1513
1514 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1515 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1516 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1517
1518 @kindex --check-sections
1519 @kindex --no-check-sections
1520 @item --check-sections
1521 @itemx --no-check-sections
1522 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1523 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1524 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1525 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1526 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1527 restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1528 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1529 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1530 option.
1531
1532 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1533 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1534 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1535 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1536 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1537 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1538 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1539 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1540 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1541 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1542 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1543 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1544
1545 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1546 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1547 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1548 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1549 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1550 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1551 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1552 symbols.
1553
1554 @cindex cross reference table
1555 @kindex --cref
1556 @item --cref
1557 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1558 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1559 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1560
1561 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1562 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1563 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1564 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1565 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1566 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1567 symbol are listed.
1568
1569 @cindex common allocation
1570 @kindex --no-define-common
1571 @item --no-define-common
1572 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1573 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1574 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1575
1576 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1577 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1578 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1579 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1580 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1581 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1582 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1583 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1584 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1585 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1586
1587 @cindex group allocation in linker script
1588 @cindex section groups
1589 @cindex COMDAT
1590 @kindex --force-group-allocation
1591 @item --force-group-allocation
1592 This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1593 normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1594 default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1595 change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1596 command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1597 effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1598
1599 @cindex symbols, from command line
1600 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1601 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1602 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1603 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1604 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1605 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1606 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1607 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1608 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1609 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1610 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1611 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1612
1613 @cindex demangling, from command line
1614 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1615 @kindex --no-demangle
1616 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1617 @itemx --no-demangle
1618 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1619 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1620 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1621 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1622 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1623 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1624 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1625 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1626 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1627
1628 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1629 @kindex -I@var{file}
1630 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1631 @item -I@var{file}
1632 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1633 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1634 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1635 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1636 doing.
1637
1638 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1639 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1640 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1641 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1642 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1643 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1644
1645 @kindex --embedded-relocs
1646 @item --embedded-relocs
1647 This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1648 that the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option
1649 is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1650 targets.
1651
1652 @kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1653 @item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1654 Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1655 in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1656
1657 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1658 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1659 @item --fatal-warnings
1660 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1661 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1662 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1663
1664 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1665 @item --force-exe-suffix
1666 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1667
1668 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1669 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1670 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1671 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1672 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1673 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1674
1675 @kindex --gc-sections
1676 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1677 @cindex garbage collection
1678 @item --gc-sections
1679 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1680 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1681 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1682 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1683 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1684 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1685 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1686
1687 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1688 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1689 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1690 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1691 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1692 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1693 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1694 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1695 relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1696 @samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
1697
1698 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1699 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1700 specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1701 @samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1702 command in the linker script.
1703
1704 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1705 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1706 @cindex garbage collection
1707 @item --print-gc-sections
1708 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1709 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1710 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1711 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1712 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1713 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1714 line.
1715
1716 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1717 @cindex garbage collection
1718 @item --gc-keep-exported
1719 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1720 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1721 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1722 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1723 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1724 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1725 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1726 ELF format targets.
1727
1728 @kindex --print-output-format
1729 @cindex output format
1730 @item --print-output-format
1731 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1732 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1733 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1734
1735 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1736 @cindex memory usage
1737 @item --print-memory-usage
1738 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1739 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1740 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1741 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1742 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1743
1744 @smallexample
1745 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1746 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1747 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1748 @end smallexample
1749
1750 @cindex help
1751 @cindex usage
1752 @kindex --help
1753 @item --help
1754 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1755
1756 @kindex --target-help
1757 @item --target-help
1758 Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard output and exit.
1759
1760 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1761 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1762 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1763 @option{-M} option, above. Specifying the empty string as @var{mapfile}
1764 (that is, @code{-Map=}) causes the link map to be written to a file
1765 named after the @var{output} file, with @code{.map} appended.
1766 Specifying a directory as @var{mapfile} causes the link map to be
1767 written into a file inside the directory. The name of the file is
1768 again based upon the @var{output} filename with @code{.map} appended.
1769
1770 @cindex memory usage
1771 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1772 @item --no-keep-memory
1773 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1774 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1775 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1776 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1777 while linking a large executable.
1778
1779 @kindex --no-undefined
1780 @kindex -z defs
1781 @kindex -z undefs
1782 @item --no-undefined
1783 @itemx -z defs
1784 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1785 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1786 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1787 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1788 libraries being linked in.
1789
1790 The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1791
1792 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1793 @kindex -z muldefs
1794 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1795 @itemx -z muldefs
1796 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1797 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1798 first definition will be used.
1799
1800 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1801 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1802 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1803 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1804 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1805 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1806 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1807 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1808 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1809
1810 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1811 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1812 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1813 a shared library.
1814
1815 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1816 libraries specified at link time are that:
1817
1818 @itemize @bullet
1819 @item
1820 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1821 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1822 resolvable at load time.
1823 @item
1824 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1825 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1826
1827 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1828 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1829 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1830 appropriate memset function.
1831 @end itemize
1832
1833 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1834 @item --no-undefined-version
1835 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1836 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1837 will be issued instead.
1838
1839 @kindex --default-symver
1840 @item --default-symver
1841 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1842 exported symbols.
1843
1844 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1845 @item --default-imported-symver
1846 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1847 imported symbols.
1848
1849 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1850 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1851 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1852 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1853 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1854 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1855 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1856 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1857 inappropriate.
1858
1859 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1860 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1861 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1862 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1863
1864 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1865 @item --no-whole-archive
1866 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1867 archive files.
1868
1869 @cindex output file after errors
1870 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1871 @item --noinhibit-exec
1872 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1873 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1874 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1875 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1876
1877 @kindex -nostdlib
1878 @item -nostdlib
1879 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1880 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1881 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1882
1883 @ifclear SingleFormat
1884 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1885 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1886 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1887 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1888 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1889 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1890 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1891 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1892 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1893 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1894 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1895 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1896 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1897 @end ifclear
1898
1899 @kindex --out-implib
1900 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1901 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1902 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1903 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1904 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1905 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1906 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1907 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1908
1909 @kindex -pie
1910 @kindex --pic-executable
1911 @item -pie
1912 @itemx --pic-executable
1913 @cindex position independent executables
1914 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1915 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1916 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1917 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1918 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1919 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1920
1921 @kindex -qmagic
1922 @item -qmagic
1923 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1924
1925 @kindex -Qy
1926 @item -Qy
1927 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1928
1929 @kindex --relax
1930 @cindex synthesizing linker
1931 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1932 @cindex --no-relax
1933 @item --relax
1934 @itemx --no-relax
1935 An option with machine dependent effects.
1936 @ifset GENERIC
1937 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1938 @end ifset
1939 @ifset H8300
1940 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1941 @end ifset
1942 @ifset XTENSA
1943 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1944 @end ifset
1945 @ifset M68HC11
1946 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1947 @end ifset
1948 @ifset NIOSII
1949 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1950 @end ifset
1951 @ifset POWERPC
1952 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1953 @end ifset
1954
1955 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target-specific,
1956 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1957 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1958 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1959 instructions, and combining constant values.
1960
1961 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1962 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1963 @ifset GENERIC
1964 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1965 family of processors.
1966 @end ifset
1967
1968 @ifset GENERIC
1969 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1970 but ignored.
1971 @end ifset
1972
1973 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1974 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1975
1976 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1977 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1978 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1979 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1980 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1981 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1982 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1983 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1984 @ifset GENERIC
1985 (such as VxWorks)
1986 @end ifset
1987 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1988 run-time memory.
1989
1990 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1991 or symbols needed for relocations.
1992
1993 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1994 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1995
1996 @ifset GENERIC
1997 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1998 @cindex runtime library search path
1999 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
2000 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
2001 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
2002 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
2003 them to locate shared objects at runtime.
2004
2005 The @option{-rpath} option is also used when locating shared objects which
2006 are needed by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
2007 description of the @option{-rpath-link} option. Searching @option{-rpath}
2008 in this way is only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which
2009 have been configured with the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
2010
2011 If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an ELF executable, the
2012 contents of the environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it
2013 is defined.
2014
2015 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
2016 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
2017 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
2018 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
2019 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
2020 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
2021 file systems.
2022
2023 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
2024 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
2025 the @option{-rpath} option.
2026 @end ifset
2027
2028 @ifset GENERIC
2029 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
2030 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
2031 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
2032 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
2033 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
2034 of the input files.
2035
2036 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
2037 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
2038 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
2039 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
2040 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
2041 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
2042 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
2043 appearing multiple times.
2044
2045 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
2046 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
2047 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
2048 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
2049 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
2050
2051 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
2052 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
2053 supported.
2054
2055 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
2056 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
2057 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
2058 runtime linker would do.
2059
2060 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
2061 libraries:
2062
2063 @enumerate
2064 @item
2065 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
2066 @item
2067 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
2068 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
2069 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
2070 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
2071 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2072 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2073 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
2074 @item
2075 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2076 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2077 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
2078 @item
2079 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2080 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
2081 @item
2082 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
2083 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
2084 @item
2085 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2086 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2087 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2088 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2089 @item
2090 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2091 @item
2092 For a linker for a Linux system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2093 exists, the list of directories found in that file. Note: the path
2094 to this file is prefixed with the @code{sysroot} value, if that is
2095 defined, and then any @code{prefix} string if the linker was
2096 configured with the @command{--prefix=<path>} option.
2097 @item
2098 For a native linker on a FreeBSD system, any directories specified by
2099 the @code{_PATH_ELF_HINTS} macro defined in the @file{elf-hints.h}
2100 header file.
2101 @item
2102 Any directories specifed by a @code{SEARCH_DIR} command in the
2103 linker script being used.
2104 @end enumerate
2105
2106 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2107 warning and continue with the link.
2108 @end ifset
2109
2110 @kindex -shared
2111 @kindex -Bshareable
2112 @item -shared
2113 @itemx -Bshareable
2114 @cindex shared libraries
2115 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2116 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
2117 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
2118 undefined symbols in the link.
2119
2120 @kindex --sort-common
2121 @item --sort-common
2122 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
2123 @itemx --sort-common=descending
2124 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2125 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2126 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2127 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2128 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2129 specified, then descending order is assumed.
2130
2131 @kindex --sort-section=name
2132 @item --sort-section=name
2133 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2134 patterns in the linker script.
2135
2136 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
2137 @item --sort-section=alignment
2138 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2139 patterns in the linker script.
2140
2141 @kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2142 @item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2143 This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2144 .dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2145 post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2146
2147 @kindex --split-by-file
2148 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2149 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2150 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2151 size of 1 if not given.
2152
2153 @kindex --split-by-reloc
2154 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2155 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2156 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2157 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2158 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2159 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2160 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2161 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2162 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2163 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2164 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2165
2166 @kindex --stats
2167 @item --stats
2168 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2169 as execution time and memory usage.
2170
2171 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2172 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2173 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2174 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2175 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2176
2177 @kindex --task-link
2178 @item --task-link
2179 This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2180 file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2181
2182 @kindex --traditional-format
2183 @cindex traditional format
2184 @item --traditional-format
2185 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2186 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2187 use the traditional format instead.
2188
2189 @cindex dbx
2190 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2191 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2192 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2193 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2194 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2195 combine duplicate entries.
2196
2197 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2198 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2199 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2200 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2201 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2202 line.
2203 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2204 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2205 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2206 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2207 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2208
2209 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2210 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2211 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2212 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2213 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2214 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2215 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2216 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2217 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2218
2219 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2220 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2221 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2222 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2223 byte of the text segment.
2224
2225 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2226 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2227 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2228 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2229 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2230 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2231
2232 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2233 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2234 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2235 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2236 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2237
2238 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2239 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2240 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2241 values for @samp{method}:
2242
2243 @table @samp
2244 @item ignore-all
2245 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2246
2247 @item report-all
2248 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2249
2250 @item ignore-in-object-files
2251 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2252 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2253
2254 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2255 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2256 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2257 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2258 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2259 command line.
2260 @end table
2261
2262 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2263 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2264
2265 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2266 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2267 can change this to a warning.
2268
2269 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2270 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2271 @item --dll-verbose
2272 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2273 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2274 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2275 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2276 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2277
2278 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2279 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2280 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2281 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2282 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2283 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2284 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2285 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2286 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2287 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2288 @xref{WIN32}.
2289
2290 @kindex --warn-common
2291 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2292 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2293 @item --warn-common
2294 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2295 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2296 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2297 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2298 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2299 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2300
2301 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2302
2303 @table @samp
2304 @item int i = 1;
2305 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2306 file.
2307
2308 @item extern int i;
2309 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2310 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2311 variable somewhere.
2312
2313 @item int i;
2314 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2315 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2316 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2317 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2318 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2319 a definition of the same variable.
2320 @end table
2321
2322 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2323 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2324 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2325 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2326 a common symbol.
2327
2328 @enumerate
2329 @item
2330 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2331 definition for the symbol.
2332 @smallexample
2333 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2334 overridden by definition
2335 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2336 @end smallexample
2337
2338 @item
2339 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2340 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2341 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2342 @smallexample
2343 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2344 overriding common
2345 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2346 @end smallexample
2347
2348 @item
2349 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2350 @smallexample
2351 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2352 of `@var{symbol}'
2353 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2354 @end smallexample
2355
2356 @item
2357 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2358 @smallexample
2359 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2360 overridden by larger common
2361 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2362 @end smallexample
2363
2364 @item
2365 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2366 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2367 encountered in a different order.
2368 @smallexample
2369 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2370 overriding smaller common
2371 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2372 @end smallexample
2373 @end enumerate
2374
2375 @kindex --warn-constructors
2376 @item --warn-constructors
2377 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2378 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2379 detect the use of global constructors.
2380
2381 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2382 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2383 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2384 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2385 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2386 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2387 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2388 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2389 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2390 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2391 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2392 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2393 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2394
2395 @kindex --warn-once
2396 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2397 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2398 @item --warn-once
2399 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2400 which refers to it.
2401
2402 @kindex --warn-section-align
2403 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2404 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2405 @item --warn-section-align
2406 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2407 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2408 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2409 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2410 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2411
2412 @kindex --warn-textrel
2413 @item --warn-textrel
2414 Warn if the linker adds DT_TEXTREL to a position-independent executable
2415 or shared object.
2416
2417 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2418 @item --warn-alternate-em
2419 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2420
2421 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2422 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2423 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2424 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2425 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2426
2427 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2428 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2429 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2430 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2431
2432 @kindex --whole-archive
2433 @cindex including an entire archive
2434 @item --whole-archive
2435 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2436 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2437 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2438 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2439 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2440 library. This option may be used more than once.
2441
2442 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2443 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2444 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2445 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2446 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2447
2448 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2449 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2450 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2451 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2452 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2453 @var{symbol}.
2454
2455 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2456 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2457 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2458 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2459
2460 Here is a trivial example:
2461
2462 @smallexample
2463 void *
2464 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2465 @{
2466 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2467 return __real_malloc (c);
2468 @}
2469 @end smallexample
2470
2471 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2472 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2473 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2474 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2475
2476 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2477 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2478 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2479 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2480 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2481
2482 Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2483 internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2484 @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2485 @code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2486
2487 @smallexample
2488 int
2489 f (void)
2490 @{
2491 return 123;
2492 @}
2493
2494 int
2495 g (void)
2496 @{
2497 return f();
2498 @}
2499 @end smallexample
2500
2501 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2502 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2503 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2504 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2505 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2506 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2507 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2508
2509 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2510 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2511 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2512 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2513 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2514
2515 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2516 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2517 @item --enable-new-dtags
2518 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2519 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2520 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2521 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2522 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2523 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2524 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2525 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2526
2527 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2528 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2529 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2530 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2531 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2532 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2533 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2534
2535 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2536 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2537 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2538 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2539 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2540 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2541 hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2542 but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
2543
2544 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2545 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2546 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2547 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2548 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2549 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2550 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2551 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2552 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2553 compressed using zlib.
2554
2555 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2556 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2557 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2558 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2559 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2560 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2561
2562 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2563 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2564
2565 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2566 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2567 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2568 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2569
2570 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2571 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2572 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2573 @option{--help} option.
2574
2575 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2576 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2577 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2578 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2579 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2580 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2581
2582 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2583 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2584 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2585 has been used.
2586
2587 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2588 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2589
2590 @kindex --build-id
2591 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2592 @item --build-id
2593 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2594 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2595 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2596 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2597 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2598 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2599 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2600 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2601 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2602 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2603 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2604
2605 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2606 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2607 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2608 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2609 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2610 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2611
2612 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2613 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2614 @end table
2615
2616 @c man end
2617
2618 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2619
2620 @c man begin OPTIONS
2621
2622 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2623 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2624 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2625 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2626 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2627 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2628 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2629 object file).
2630
2631 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2632 support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
2633 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2634 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2635
2636 @table @gcctabopt
2637
2638 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2639 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2640 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2641 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2642 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2643
2644 @kindex --base-file
2645 @item --base-file @var{file}
2646 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2647 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2648 @file{dlltool}.
2649 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2650
2651 @kindex --dll
2652 @item --dll
2653 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2654 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2655 file.
2656 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2657
2658 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2659 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2660 @item --enable-long-section-names
2661 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2662 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2663 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2664 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2665 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2666 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2667 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2668 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2669 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2670 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2671 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2672 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2673 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2674 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2675 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2676 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2677 image and not stripping symbols.
2678 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2679
2680 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2681 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2682 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2683 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2684 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2685 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2686 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2687 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2688 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2689 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2690 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2691 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2692 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2693 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2694 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2695 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2696 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2697 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2698
2699 @kindex --leading-underscore
2700 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2701 @item --leading-underscore
2702 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2703 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2704 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2705 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2706
2707 @cindex DLLs, creating
2708 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2709 @item --export-all-symbols
2710 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2711 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2712 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2713 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2714 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2715 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2716 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2717 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2718 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2719 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2720 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2721 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2722 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2723 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2724 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2725 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2726 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2727 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2728 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2729 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2730 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2731 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2732 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2733
2734 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2735 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2736 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2737 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2738 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2739
2740 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2741 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2742 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2743 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2744
2745 @kindex --file-alignment
2746 @item --file-alignment
2747 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2748 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2749 512.
2750 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2751
2752 @cindex heap size
2753 @kindex --heap
2754 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2755 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2756 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2757 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2758 committed.
2759 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2760
2761 @cindex image base
2762 @kindex --image-base
2763 @item --image-base @var{value}
2764 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2765 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2766 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2767 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2768 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2769 for dlls.
2770 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2771
2772 @kindex --kill-at
2773 @item --kill-at
2774 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2775 symbols before they are exported.
2776 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2777
2778 @kindex --large-address-aware
2779 @item --large-address-aware
2780 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2781 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2782 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2783 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2784 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2785 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2786
2787 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2788 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2789 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2790 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2791 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2792 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2793 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2794
2795 @kindex --major-image-version
2796 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2797 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2798 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2799
2800 @kindex --major-os-version
2801 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2802 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2803 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2804
2805 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2806 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2807 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2808 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2809
2810 @kindex --minor-image-version
2811 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2812 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2813 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2814
2815 @kindex --minor-os-version
2816 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2817 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2818 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2819
2820 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2821 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2822 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2823 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2824
2825 @cindex DEF files, creating
2826 @cindex DLLs, creating
2827 @kindex --output-def
2828 @item --output-def @var{file}
2829 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2830 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2831 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2832 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2833 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2834 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2835
2836 @cindex DLLs, creating
2837 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2838 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2839 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2840 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2841 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2842 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2843 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2844 execution are avoided.
2845 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2846
2847 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2848 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2849 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2850 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2851 default.
2852 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2853
2854 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2855 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2856 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2857 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2858 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2859 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2860 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2861 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2862 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2863 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2864
2865 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2866 @item --enable-auto-import
2867 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2868 DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2869 mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2870 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2871
2872 The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2873 feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2874
2875 Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2876 of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2877 PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
2878
2879 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2880 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2881 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2882 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2883 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2884
2885 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2886 see this message:
2887
2888 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2889 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2890
2891 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2892 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2893 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2894 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2895 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2896 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2897 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2898 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2899 the warning, and exit.
2900
2901 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2902 data type of the exported variable:
2903
2904 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2905 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2906 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2907
2908 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2909 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2910 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2911 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2912
2913 @example
2914 extern type extern_array[];
2915 extern_array[1] -->
2916 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2917 @end example
2918
2919 or
2920
2921 @example
2922 extern type extern_array[];
2923 extern_array[1] -->
2924 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2925 @end example
2926
2927 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2928 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2929
2930 @example
2931 extern struct s extern_struct;
2932 extern_struct.field -->
2933 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2934 @end example
2935
2936 or
2937
2938 @example
2939 extern long long extern_ll;
2940 extern_ll -->
2941 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2942 @end example
2943
2944 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2945 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2946 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2947 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2948 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2949 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2950 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2951 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2952
2953 Original:
2954 @example
2955 --foo.h
2956 extern int arr[];
2957 --foo.c
2958 #include "foo.h"
2959 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2960 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2961 @}
2962 @end example
2963
2964 Solution 1:
2965 @example
2966 --foo.h
2967 extern int arr[];
2968 --foo.c
2969 #include "foo.h"
2970 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2971 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2972 volatile int *parr = arr;
2973 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2974 @}
2975 @end example
2976
2977 Solution 2:
2978 @example
2979 --foo.h
2980 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2981 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2982 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2983 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2984 #else
2985 #define FOO_IMPORT
2986 #endif
2987 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2988 --foo.c
2989 #include "foo.h"
2990 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2991 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2992 @}
2993 @end example
2994
2995 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2996 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2997 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2998 functions).
2999
3000 @kindex --disable-auto-import
3001 @item --disable-auto-import
3002 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
3003 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
3004 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3005
3006 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3007 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3008 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
3009 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
3010 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
3011 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
3012 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3013
3014 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3015 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3016 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
3017 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3018
3019 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
3020 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
3021 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
3022 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3023
3024 @kindex --section-alignment
3025 @item --section-alignment
3026 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
3027 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
3028 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3029
3030 @cindex stack size
3031 @kindex --stack
3032 @item --stack @var{reserve}
3033 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
3034 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
3035 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
3036 committed.
3037 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3038
3039 @kindex --subsystem
3040 @item --subsystem @var{which}
3041 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
3042 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
3043 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
3044 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
3045 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
3046 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
3047 @var{which}.
3048 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3049
3050 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
3051 of the PE file header:
3052 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
3053
3054 @kindex --high-entropy-va
3055 @item --high-entropy-va
3056 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
3057 (ASLR).
3058 This option also implies @option{--dynamicbase} and
3059 @option{--enable-reloc-section}.
3060
3061 @kindex --dynamicbase
3062 @item --dynamicbase
3063 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
3064 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
3065 Vista for i386 PE targets.
3066 This option also implies @option{--enable-reloc-section}.
3067
3068 @kindex --forceinteg
3069 @item --forceinteg
3070 Code integrity checks are enforced.
3071
3072 @kindex --nxcompat
3073 @item --nxcompat
3074 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
3075 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
3076
3077 @kindex --no-isolation
3078 @item --no-isolation
3079 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
3080
3081 @kindex --no-seh
3082 @item --no-seh
3083 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3084 this image.
3085
3086 @kindex --no-bind
3087 @item --no-bind
3088 Do not bind this image.
3089
3090 @kindex --wdmdriver
3091 @item --wdmdriver
3092 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
3093
3094 @kindex --tsaware
3095 @item --tsaware
3096 The image is Terminal Server aware.
3097
3098 @kindex --insert-timestamp
3099 @item --insert-timestamp
3100 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3101 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3102 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3103 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
3104 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
3105 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3106 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
3107 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
3108 identically.
3109
3110 @kindex --enable-reloc-section
3111 @item --enable-reloc-section
3112 Create the base relocation table, which is necessary if the image
3113 is loaded at a different image base than specified in the PE header.
3114 @end table
3115
3116 @c man end
3117
3118 @ifset C6X
3119 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3120
3121 @c man begin OPTIONS
3122
3123 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3124 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3125 all executables use an index of 0.
3126
3127 @table @gcctabopt
3128
3129 @kindex --dsbt-size
3130 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
3131 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
3132 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3133 entries.
3134
3135 @kindex --dsbt-index
3136 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3137 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3138 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3139 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3140 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3141
3142 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3143 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3144 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3145
3146 @end table
3147
3148 @c man end
3149 @end ifset
3150
3151 @ifset CSKY
3152 @subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3153
3154 @c man begin OPTIONS
3155
3156 @table @gcctabopt
3157
3158 @kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3159 @item --branch-stub
3160 This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3161 sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3162 usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3163 can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3164 the compiler or assembler.
3165
3166 @kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3167 @item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3168 This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3169 It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3170 be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3171 stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3172 sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3173 @samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3174 linker should choose suitable defaults.
3175
3176 @end table
3177
3178 @c man end
3179 @end ifset
3180
3181 @ifset M68HC11
3182 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3183
3184 @c man begin OPTIONS
3185
3186 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3187 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3188
3189 @table @gcctabopt
3190
3191 @kindex --no-trampoline
3192 @item --no-trampoline
3193 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3194 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3195 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3196
3197 @kindex --bank-window
3198 @item --bank-window @var{name}
3199 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3200 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3201 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3202 paging and addresses within the memory window.
3203
3204 @end table
3205
3206 @c man end
3207 @end ifset
3208
3209 @ifset M68K
3210 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3211
3212 @c man begin OPTIONS
3213
3214 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3215 when linking for 68K targets.
3216
3217 @table @gcctabopt
3218
3219 @kindex --got
3220 @item --got=@var{type}
3221 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3222 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3223 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3224 Info entry for @file{ld}.
3225
3226 @end table
3227
3228 @c man end
3229 @end ifset
3230
3231 @ifset MIPS
3232 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3233
3234 @c man begin OPTIONS
3235
3236 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3237 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3238 linking for MIPS targets.
3239
3240 @table @gcctabopt
3241
3242 @kindex --insn32
3243 @item --insn32
3244 @kindex --no-insn32
3245 @itemx --no-insn32
3246 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3247 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3248 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3249 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3250 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3251 possible.
3252
3253 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3254 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3255 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3256 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3257 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3258 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3259 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3260 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3261 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3262 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3263 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3264 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3265 an error.
3266
3267 @kindex --compact-branches
3268 @item --compact-branches
3269 @kindex --no-compact-branches
3270 @itemx --no-compact-branches
3271 These options control the generation of compact instructions by the linker
3272 in the PLT entries for MIPS R6.
3273
3274 @end table
3275
3276 @c man end
3277 @end ifset
3278
3279
3280 @ifset PDP11
3281 @subsection Options specific to PDP11 targets
3282
3283 @c man begin OPTIONS
3284
3285 For the pdp11-aout target, three variants of the output format can be
3286 produced as selected by the following options. The default variant
3287 for pdp11-aout is the @samp{--omagic} option, whereas for other
3288 targets @samp{--nmagic} is the default. The @samp{--imagic} option is
3289 defined only for the pdp11-aout target, while the others are described
3290 here as they apply to the pdp11-aout target.
3291
3292 @table @gcctabopt
3293
3294 @kindex -N
3295 @item -N
3296 @kindex --omagic
3297 @itemx --omagic
3298
3299 Mark the output as @code{OMAGIC} (0407) in the @file{a.out} header to
3300 indicate that the text segment is not to be write-protected and
3301 shared. Since the text and data sections are both readable and
3302 writable, the data section is allocated immediately contiguous after
3303 the text segment. This is the oldest format for PDP11 executable
3304 programs and is the default for @command{ld} on PDP11 Unix systems
3305 from the beginning through 2.11BSD.
3306
3307 @kindex -n
3308 @item -n
3309 @kindex --nmagic
3310 @itemx --nmagic
3311
3312 Mark the output as @code{NMAGIC} (0410) in the @file{a.out} header to
3313 indicate that when the output file is executed, the text portion will
3314 be read-only and shareable among all processes executing the same
3315 file. This involves moving the data areas up to the first possible 8K
3316 byte page boundary following the end of the text. This option creates
3317 a @emph{pure executable} format.
3318
3319 @kindex -z
3320 @item -z
3321 @kindex --imagic
3322 @itemx --imagic
3323
3324 Mark the output as @code{IMAGIC} (0411) in the @file{a.out} header to
3325 indicate that when the output file is executed, the program text and
3326 data areas will be loaded into separate address spaces using the split
3327 instruction and data space feature of the memory management unit in
3328 larger models of the PDP11. This doubles the address space available
3329 to the program. The text segment is again pure, write-protected, and
3330 shareable. The only difference in the output format between this
3331 option and the others, besides the magic number, is that both the text
3332 and data sections start at location 0. The @samp{-z} option selected
3333 this format in 2.11BSD. This option creates a @emph{separate
3334 executable} format.
3335
3336 @kindex --no-omagic
3337 @item --no-omagic
3338
3339 Equivalent to @samp{--nmagic} for pdp11-aout.
3340
3341 @end table
3342
3343 @c man end
3344 @end ifset
3345
3346 @ifset UsesEnvVars
3347 @node Environment
3348 @section Environment Variables
3349
3350 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3351
3352 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3353 @ifclear SingleFormat
3354 @code{GNUTARGET},
3355 @end ifclear
3356 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3357
3358 @ifclear SingleFormat
3359 @kindex GNUTARGET
3360 @cindex default input format
3361 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3362 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3363 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3364 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3365 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3366 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3367 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3368 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3369 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3370 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3371 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3372 @end ifclear
3373
3374 @kindex LDEMULATION
3375 @cindex default emulation
3376 @cindex emulation, default
3377 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3378 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3379 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3380 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3381 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3382 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3383 linker was configured.
3384
3385 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3386 @cindex demangling, default
3387 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3388 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3389 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3390 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3391 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3392 options.
3393
3394 @c man end
3395 @end ifset
3396
3397 @node Scripts
3398 @chapter Linker Scripts
3399
3400 @cindex scripts
3401 @cindex linker scripts
3402 @cindex command files
3403 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3404 written in the linker command language.
3405
3406 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3407 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3408 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3409 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3410 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3411 described below.
3412
3413 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3414 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3415 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3416 to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
3417 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3418
3419 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3420 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3421 default linker script.
3422
3423 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3424 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3425 Linker Scripts}.
3426
3427 @menu
3428 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3429 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3430 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3431 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3432 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3433 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3434 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3435 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3436 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3437 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3438 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3439 @end menu
3440
3441 @node Basic Script Concepts
3442 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3443 @cindex linker script concepts
3444 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3445 describe the linker script language.
3446
3447 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3448 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3449 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3450 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3451 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3452 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3453 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3454 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3455
3456 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3457 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3458 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3459 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3460 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3461 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3462 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3463 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3464 of debugging information.
3465
3466 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3467 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3468 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3469 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3470 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3471 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3472 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3473 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3474 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3475 RAM address would be the VMA.
3476
3477 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3478 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3479
3480 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3481 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3482 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3483 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3484 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3485 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3486 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3487
3488 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3489 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3490 option.
3491
3492 @node Script Format
3493 @section Linker Script Format
3494 @cindex linker script format
3495 Linker scripts are text files.
3496
3497 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3498 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3499 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3500 generally ignored.
3501
3502 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3503 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3504 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3505 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3506 file name.
3507
3508 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3509 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3510 to whitespace.
3511
3512 @node Simple Example
3513 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3514 @cindex linker script example
3515 @cindex example of linker script
3516 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3517
3518 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3519 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3520 memory layout of the output file.
3521
3522 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3523 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3524 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3525 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3526 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3527 your input files.
3528
3529 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3530 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3531 linker script which will do that:
3532 @smallexample
3533 SECTIONS
3534 @{
3535 . = 0x10000;
3536 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3537 . = 0x8000000;
3538 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3539 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3540 @}
3541 @end smallexample
3542
3543 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3544 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3545 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3546
3547 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3548 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3549 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3550 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3551 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3552 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3553 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3554
3555 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3556 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3557 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3558 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3559 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3560 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3561
3562 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3563 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3564 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3565
3566 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3567 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3568 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3569 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3570 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3571 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3572 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3573
3574 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3575 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3576 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3577 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3578 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3579 sections.
3580
3581 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3582
3583 @node Simple Commands
3584 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3585 @cindex linker script simple commands
3586 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3587
3588 @menu
3589 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3590 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3591 @ifclear SingleFormat
3592 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3593 @end ifclear
3594
3595 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3596 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3597 @end menu
3598
3599 @node Entry Point
3600 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3601 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3602 @cindex start of execution
3603 @cindex first instruction
3604 @cindex entry point
3605 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3606 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3607 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3608 @smallexample
3609 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3610 @end smallexample
3611
3612 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3613 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3614 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3615 @itemize @bullet
3616 @item
3617 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3618 @item
3619 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3620 @item
3621 the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3622 targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3623 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3624 @item
3625 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3626 @item
3627 The address @code{0}.
3628 @end itemize
3629
3630 @node File Commands
3631 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3632 @cindex linker script file commands
3633 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3634
3635 @table @code
3636 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3637 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3638 @cindex including a linker script
3639 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3640 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3641 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3642 10 levels deep.
3643
3644 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3645 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3646
3647 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3648 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3649 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3650 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3651 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3652 @cindex linker script input object files
3653 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3654 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3655
3656 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3657 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3658 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3659
3660 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3661 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3662
3663 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3664 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3665 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3666 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying
3667 @code{=} as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the
3668 filename path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of
3669 @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3670
3671 If a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is not used then the linker will try to open
3672 the file in the directory containing the linker script. If it is not
3673 found the linker will then search the current directory. If it is still
3674 not found the linker will search through the archive library search
3675 path.
3676
3677 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3678 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
3679 @samp{-l}.
3680
3681 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3682 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3683 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3684
3685 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3686 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3687 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3688 @cindex grouping input files
3689 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3690 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3691 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3692 in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3693
3694 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3695 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3696 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3697 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3698 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3699 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3700 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3701 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3702 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3703 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3704 setting afterwards.
3705
3706 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3707 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3708 @cindex output file name in linker script
3709 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3710 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3711 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3712 Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
3713 precedence.
3714
3715 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3716 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3717
3718 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3719 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3720 @cindex library search path in linker script
3721 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3722 @cindex search path in linker script
3723 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3724 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3725 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3726 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
3727 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3728 the command-line option are searched first.
3729
3730 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3731 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3732 @cindex first input file
3733 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3734 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3735 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3736 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3737 first file.
3738 @end table
3739
3740 @ifclear SingleFormat
3741 @node Format Commands
3742 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3743 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3744
3745 @table @code
3746 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3747 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3748 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3749 @cindex output file format in linker script
3750 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3751 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3752 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3753 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
3754 line option takes precedence.
3755
3756 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3757 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
3758 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3759 desired endianness.
3760
3761 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3762 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3763 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3764 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3765
3766 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3767 command:
3768 @smallexample
3769 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3770 @end smallexample
3771 This says that the default format for the output file is
3772 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
3773 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3774 format.
3775
3776 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3777 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3778 @cindex input file format in linker script
3779 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3780 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3781 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3782 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3783 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3784 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3785 @end table
3786 @end ifclear
3787
3788 @node REGION_ALIAS
3789 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3790 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3791 @cindex region alias
3792 @cindex region names
3793
3794 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3795 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3796
3797 @smallexample
3798 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3799 @end smallexample
3800
3801 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3802 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3803 to memory regions. An example follows.
3804
3805 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3806 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3807 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3808 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3809 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3810 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3811 sections:
3812
3813 @itemize @bullet
3814 @item
3815 @code{.text} program code;
3816 @item
3817 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3818 @item
3819 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3820 @item
3821 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3822 @end itemize
3823
3824 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3825 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3826 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3827 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3828 @code{C}:
3829 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3830 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3831 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3832 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3833 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3834 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3835 @end multitable
3836 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3837 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3838 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3839 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3840
3841 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3842 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3843 memory layout:
3844 @smallexample
3845 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3846
3847 SECTIONS
3848 @{
3849 .text :
3850 @{
3851 *(.text)
3852 @} > REGION_TEXT
3853 .rodata :
3854 @{
3855 *(.rodata)
3856 rodata_end = .;
3857 @} > REGION_RODATA
3858 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3859 @{
3860 data_start = .;
3861 *(.data)
3862 @} > REGION_DATA
3863 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3864 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3865 .bss :
3866 @{
3867 *(.bss)
3868 @} > REGION_BSS
3869 @}
3870 @end smallexample
3871
3872 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3873 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3874 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3875 @table @code
3876 @item A
3877 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3878 @smallexample
3879 MEMORY
3880 @{
3881 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3882 @}
3883
3884 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3885 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3886 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3887 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3888 @end smallexample
3889 @item B
3890 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3891 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3892 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3893 @smallexample
3894 MEMORY
3895 @{
3896 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3897 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3898 @}
3899
3900 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3901 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3902 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3903 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3904 @end smallexample
3905 @item C
3906 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3907 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3908 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3909 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3910 @smallexample
3911 MEMORY
3912 @{
3913 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3914 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3915 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3916 @}
3917
3918 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3919 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3920 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3921 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3922 @end smallexample
3923 @end table
3924
3925 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3926 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3927 necessary:
3928 @smallexample
3929 #include <string.h>
3930
3931 extern char data_start [];
3932 extern char data_size [];
3933 extern char data_load_start [];
3934
3935 void copy_data(void)
3936 @{
3937 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3938 @{
3939 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3940 @}
3941 @}
3942 @end smallexample
3943
3944 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3945 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3946 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3947
3948 @table @code
3949 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3950 @kindex ASSERT
3951 @cindex assertion in linker script
3952 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3953 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3954
3955 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3956 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3957 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3958 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3959 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3960
3961 @smallexample
3962 .stack :
3963 @{
3964 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3965 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3966 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3967 @}
3968 @end smallexample
3969
3970 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3971 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3972 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3973
3974 @smallexample
3975 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3976 .stack :
3977 @{
3978 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3979 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3980 @}
3981 @end smallexample
3982
3983 will work.
3984
3985 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3986 @kindex EXTERN
3987 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3988 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3989 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3990 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3991 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3992 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3993
3994 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3995 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3996 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3997 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3998 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3999 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
4000
4001 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
4002 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
4003 @cindex common allocation in linker script
4004 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
4005 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
4006 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
4007
4008 @item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
4009 @kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
4010 @cindex group allocation in linker script
4011 @cindex section groups
4012 @cindex COMDAT
4013 This command has the same effect as the
4014 @samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
4015 @command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
4016 and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
4017 specified (@samp{-r}).
4018
4019 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
4020 @kindex INSERT
4021 @cindex insert user script into default script
4022 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
4023 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
4024 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
4025 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
4026 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
4027 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
4028 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
4029 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
4030 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
4031 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
4032 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
4033 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
4034 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
4035
4036 @smallexample
4037 SECTIONS
4038 @{
4039 OVERLAY :
4040 @{
4041 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
4042 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
4043 @}
4044 @}
4045 INSERT AFTER .text;
4046 @end smallexample
4047
4048 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
4049 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
4050 @cindex cross references
4051 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
4052 references among certain output sections.
4053
4054 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
4055 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
4056 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
4057 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
4058 a function defined in the other section.
4059
4060 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
4061 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
4062 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
4063 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
4064 names.
4065
4066 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
4067 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
4068 @cindex cross references
4069 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
4070 references to one section from a list of other sections.
4071
4072 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
4073 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
4074 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
4075 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
4076 must never call back.
4077
4078 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
4079 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
4080 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
4081 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
4082 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
4083 names, not input section names.
4084
4085 @ifclear SingleFormat
4086 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
4087 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
4088 @cindex machine architecture
4089 @cindex architecture
4090 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
4091 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
4092 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
4093 the @samp{-f} option.
4094 @end ifclear
4095
4096 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
4097 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
4098 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
4099 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
4100 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
4101 @xref{Expression Section}.
4102 @end table
4103
4104 @node Assignments
4105 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
4106 @cindex assignment in scripts
4107 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
4108 @cindex variables, defining
4109 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
4110 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
4111
4112 @menu
4113 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
4114 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
4115 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
4116 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4117 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
4118 @end menu
4119
4120 @node Simple Assignments
4121 @subsection Simple Assignments
4122
4123 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
4124
4125 @table @code
4126 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
4127 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
4128 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
4129 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
4130 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
4131 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
4132 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
4133 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
4134 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
4135 @end table
4136
4137 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
4138 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
4139 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
4140
4141 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
4142 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
4143
4144 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
4145
4146 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
4147
4148 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
4149 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
4150 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
4151
4152 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
4153 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
4154
4155 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
4156 assignments may be used:
4157
4158 @smallexample
4159 floating_point = 0;
4160 SECTIONS
4161 @{
4162 .text :
4163 @{
4164 *(.text)
4165 _etext = .;
4166 @}
4167 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
4168 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4169 @}
4170 @end smallexample
4171 @noindent
4172 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4173 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4174 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4175 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4176 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4177
4178 @node HIDDEN
4179 @subsection HIDDEN
4180 @cindex HIDDEN
4181 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4182 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4183
4184 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4185 @code{HIDDEN}:
4186
4187 @smallexample
4188 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4189 SECTIONS
4190 @{
4191 .text :
4192 @{
4193 *(.text)
4194 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4195 @}
4196 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4197 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4198 @}
4199 @end smallexample
4200 @noindent
4201 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4202
4203 @node PROVIDE
4204 @subsection PROVIDE
4205 @cindex PROVIDE
4206 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4207 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4208 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4209 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4210 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4211 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4212 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4213 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4214
4215 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4216 @smallexample
4217 SECTIONS
4218 @{
4219 .text :
4220 @{
4221 *(.text)
4222 _etext = .;
4223 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4224 @}
4225 @}
4226 @end smallexample
4227
4228 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4229 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4230 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4231 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4232 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4233 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4234
4235 Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4236 defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4237 that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4238 when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4239 @samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4240
4241 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4242 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4243 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4244 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4245 hidden and won't be exported.
4246
4247 @node Source Code Reference
4248 @subsection Source Code Reference
4249
4250 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4251 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4252 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4253 symbol that does not have a value.
4254
4255 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4256 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4257 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4258 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4259 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4260 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4261 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4262 linker script variable might be referred to as:
4263
4264 @smallexample
4265 extern int foo;
4266 @end smallexample
4267
4268 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4269
4270 @smallexample
4271 _foo = 1000;
4272 @end smallexample
4273
4274 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4275 transformation has taken place.
4276
4277 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4278 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4279 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4280 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4281 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4282 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4283 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4284
4285 @smallexample
4286 int foo = 1000;
4287 @end smallexample
4288
4289 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
4290 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4291 number 1000 is initially stored.
4292
4293 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4294 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4295 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4296 So:
4297
4298 @smallexample
4299 foo = 1;
4300 @end smallexample
4301
4302 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4303 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4304 address. Whereas:
4305
4306 @smallexample
4307 int * a = & foo;
4308 @end smallexample
4309
4310 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4311 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4312 the variable @samp{a}.
4313
4314 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4315 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4316 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4317
4318 @smallexample
4319 foo = 1000;
4320 @end smallexample
4321
4322 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4323 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4324 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4325 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4326 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4327
4328 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4329 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4330 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4331 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4332 linker script contains these declarations:
4333
4334 @smallexample
4335 @group
4336 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4337 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4338 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4339 @end group
4340 @end smallexample
4341
4342 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4343
4344 @smallexample
4345 @group
4346 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4347
4348 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4349 @end group
4350 @end smallexample
4351
4352 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4353 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4354 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4355
4356 @smallexample
4357 @group
4358 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4359
4360 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4361 @end group
4362 @end smallexample
4363
4364 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4365 operators.
4366
4367 @node SECTIONS
4368 @section SECTIONS Command
4369 @kindex SECTIONS
4370 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4371 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4372
4373 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4374 @smallexample
4375 SECTIONS
4376 @{
4377 @var{sections-command}
4378 @var{sections-command}
4379 @dots{}
4380 @}
4381 @end smallexample
4382
4383 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4384
4385 @itemize @bullet
4386 @item
4387 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4388 @item
4389 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4390 @item
4391 an output section description
4392 @item
4393 an overlay description
4394 @end itemize
4395
4396 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4397 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4398 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4399 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4400 the layout of the output file.
4401
4402 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4403 below.
4404
4405 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4406 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4407 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4408 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4409 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4410 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4411
4412 @menu
4413 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4414 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4415 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4416 * Input Section:: Input section description
4417 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4418 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4419 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4420 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4421 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4422 @end menu
4423
4424 @node Output Section Description
4425 @subsection Output Section Description
4426 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4427 @smallexample
4428 @group
4429 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4430 [AT(@var{lma})]
4431 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4432 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4433 [@var{constraint}]
4434 @{
4435 @var{output-section-command}
4436 @var{output-section-command}
4437 @dots{}
4438 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4439 @end group
4440 @end smallexample
4441
4442 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4443
4444 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4445 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4446 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4447 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4448 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4449
4450 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4451
4452 @itemize @bullet
4453 @item
4454 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4455 @item
4456 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4457 @item
4458 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4459 @item
4460 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4461 @end itemize
4462
4463 @node Output Section Name
4464 @subsection Output Section Name
4465 @cindex name, section
4466 @cindex section name
4467 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4468 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4469 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4470 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4471 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4472 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4473 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4474 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4475 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4476 commas must be quoted.
4477
4478 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4479 Discarding}.
4480
4481 @node Output Section Address
4482 @subsection Output Section Address
4483 @cindex address, section
4484 @cindex section address
4485 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4486 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4487 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4488
4489 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4490 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4491 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4492 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4493 contained within the output section.
4494
4495 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4496
4497 @itemize @bullet
4498 @item
4499 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4500 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4501 in that region.
4502
4503 @item
4504 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4505 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4506 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4507 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4508
4509 @item
4510 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4511 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4512 counter.
4513 @end itemize
4514
4515 @noindent
4516 For example:
4517
4518 @smallexample
4519 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4520 @end smallexample
4521
4522 @noindent
4523 and
4524
4525 @smallexample
4526 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4527 @end smallexample
4528
4529 @noindent
4530 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4531 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4532 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4533 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4534 input sections.
4535
4536 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4537 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4538 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4539 do something like this:
4540 @smallexample
4541 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4542 @end smallexample
4543 @noindent
4544 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4545 aligned upward to the specified value.
4546
4547 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4548 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4549 sections are ignored).
4550
4551 @node Input Section
4552 @subsection Input Section Description
4553 @cindex input sections
4554 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4555 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4556
4557 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4558 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4559 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4560 map the input files into your memory layout.
4561
4562 @menu
4563 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4564 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4565 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4566 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4567 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4568 @end menu
4569
4570 @node Input Section Basics
4571 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4572 @cindex input section basics
4573 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4574 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4575
4576 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4577 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4578
4579 The most common input section description is to include all input
4580 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4581 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4582 @smallexample
4583 *(.text)
4584 @end smallexample
4585 @noindent
4586 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4587 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4588 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4589 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4590 example:
4591 @smallexample
4592 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4593 @end smallexample
4594 @noindent
4595 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4596 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4597 placed inside the section list, for example:
4598 @smallexample
4599 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4600 @end smallexample
4601 @noindent
4602 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4603 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4604 more than one section, as described below.
4605
4606 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4607 @smallexample
4608 *(.text .rdata)
4609 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4610 @end smallexample
4611 @noindent
4612 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4613 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4614 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4615 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4616 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4617 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4618
4619 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4620 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4621 immediately following section, for example:
4622 @smallexample
4623 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4624 @end smallexample
4625 @noindent
4626 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4627 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4628 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4629 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4630 could be modified to:
4631 @smallexample
4632 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4633 @end smallexample
4634 @noindent
4635 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4636 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4637 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4638 @smallexample
4639 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4640 @end smallexample
4641
4642 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4643 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4644 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4645 @smallexample
4646 data.o(.data)
4647 @end smallexample
4648
4649 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4650 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4651
4652 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4653
4654 @smallexample
4655 @group
4656 SECTIONS @{
4657 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4658 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4659 @}
4660 @end group
4661 @end smallexample
4662
4663 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4664 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4665 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4666 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4667 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4668
4669 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4670 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4671 with no whitespace around the colon.
4672
4673 @table @samp
4674 @item archive:file
4675 matches file within archive
4676 @item archive:
4677 matches the whole archive
4678 @item :file
4679 matches file but not one in an archive
4680 @end table
4681
4682 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4683 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4684 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4685 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4686 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4687 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4688 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4689 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4690 command.
4691
4692 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4693 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4694 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4695 @smallexample
4696 data.o
4697 @end smallexample
4698
4699 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4700 and does not contain any wild card
4701 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4702 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4703 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4704 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4705 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4706 the archive search path.
4707
4708 @node Input Section Wildcards
4709 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4710 @cindex input section wildcards
4711 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4712 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4713 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4714 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4715 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4716
4717 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4718 pattern for the file name.
4719
4720 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4721
4722 @table @samp
4723 @item *
4724 matches any number of characters
4725 @item ?
4726 matches any single character
4727 @item [@var{chars}]
4728 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4729 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4730 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4731 @item \
4732 quotes the following character
4733 @end table
4734
4735 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4736 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4737 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4738 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4739 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4740 a @samp{/} character.
4741
4742 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4743 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4744 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4745
4746 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4747 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4748 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4749 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4750 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4751 @smallexample
4752 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4753 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4754 @end smallexample
4755
4756 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4757 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4758 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4759 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4760 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4761 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4762 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4763
4764 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4765 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4766 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into descending order of
4767 alignment before placing them in the output file. Placing larger
4768 alignments before smaller alignments can reduce the amount of padding
4769 needed.
4770
4771 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4772 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is also similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4773 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into ascending
4774 numerical order of the GCC init_priority attribute encoded in the
4775 section name before placing them in the output file. In
4776 @code{.init_array.NNNNN} and @code{.fini_array.NNNNN}, @code{NNNNN} is
4777 the init_priority. In @code{.ctors.NNNNN} and @code{.dtors.NNNNN},
4778 @code{NNNNN} is 65535 minus the init_priority.
4779
4780 @cindex SORT
4781 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4782
4783 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4784 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4785
4786 @enumerate
4787 @item
4788 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4789 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4790 sections have the same name.
4791 @item
4792 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4793 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4794 sections have the same alignment.
4795 @item
4796 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4797 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4798 @item
4799 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4800 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4801 @item
4802 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4803 @end enumerate
4804
4805 When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
4806 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4807 takes precedence over the command-line option.
4808
4809 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4810 command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
4811 treated as nested sorting command.
4812
4813 @enumerate
4814 @item
4815 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4816 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4817 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4818 @item
4819 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4820 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4821 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4822 @end enumerate
4823
4824 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4825 command-line option will be ignored.
4826
4827 @cindex SORT_NONE
4828 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
4829 section sorting option.
4830
4831 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4832 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4833 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4834
4835 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4836 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4837 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4838 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4839 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4840 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4841 @smallexample
4842 @group
4843 SECTIONS @{
4844 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4845 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4846 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4847 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4848 @}
4849 @end group
4850 @end smallexample
4851
4852 @node Input Section Common
4853 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4854 @cindex common symbol placement
4855 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4856 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4857 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4858 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4859 named @samp{COMMON}.
4860
4861 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4862 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4863 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4864 input files are placed in another section.
4865
4866 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4867 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4868 @smallexample
4869 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4870 @end smallexample
4871
4872 @cindex scommon section
4873 @cindex small common symbols
4874 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4875 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4876 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4877 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4878 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4879 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4880 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4881 locations.
4882
4883 @cindex [COMMON]
4884 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4885 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4886 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4887
4888 @node Input Section Keep
4889 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4890 @cindex KEEP
4891 @cindex garbage collection
4892 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4893 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4894 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4895 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4896 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4897
4898 @node Input Section Example
4899 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4900 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4901 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4902 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4903 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4904 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4905 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4906 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4907 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4908 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4909
4910 @smallexample
4911 @group
4912 SECTIONS @{
4913 outputa 0x10000 :
4914 @{
4915 all.o
4916 foo.o (.input1)
4917 @}
4918 @end group
4919 @group
4920 outputb :
4921 @{
4922 foo.o (.input2)
4923 foo1.o (.input1)
4924 @}
4925 @end group
4926 @group
4927 outputc :
4928 @{
4929 *(.input1)
4930 *(.input2)
4931 @}
4932 @}
4933 @end group
4934 @end smallexample
4935
4936 If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4937 and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4938 automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4939 __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4940 indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4941 respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4942 C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4943
4944 @node Output Section Data
4945 @subsection Output Section Data
4946 @cindex data
4947 @cindex section data
4948 @cindex output section data
4949 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4950 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4951 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4952 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4953 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4954 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4955 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4956 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4957 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4958 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4959 counter.
4960
4961 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4962 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4963 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4964 stored.
4965
4966 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4967 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4968 @smallexample
4969 BYTE(1)
4970 LONG(addr)
4971 @end smallexample
4972
4973 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4974 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4975 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4976 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4977 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4978
4979 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4980 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4981 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4982 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4983 endianness of the first input object file.
4984
4985 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4986 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4987 @smallexample
4988 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4989 @end smallexample
4990 whereas this will work:
4991 @smallexample
4992 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4993 @end smallexample
4994
4995 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4996 @cindex holes, filling
4997 @cindex unspecified memory
4998 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4999 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
5000 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
5001 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
5002 with the value of the expression, repeated as
5003 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
5004 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
5005 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
5006 different parts of an output section.
5007
5008 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
5009 value @samp{0x90}:
5010 @smallexample
5011 FILL(0x90909090)
5012 @end smallexample
5013
5014 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
5015 section attribute, but it only affects the
5016 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
5017 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
5018 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
5019 expression.
5020
5021 @node Output Section Keywords
5022 @subsection Output Section Keywords
5023 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
5024 commands.
5025
5026 @table @code
5027 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
5028 @cindex input filename symbols
5029 @cindex filename symbols
5030 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
5031 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
5032 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
5033 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
5034 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
5035
5036 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
5037 normally used for any other object file format.
5038
5039 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
5040 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
5041 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
5042 @item CONSTRUCTORS
5043 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
5044 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
5045 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
5046 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
5047 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
5048 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
5049 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
5050 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
5051 ignored for other object file formats.
5052
5053 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
5054 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
5055 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
5056 the start and end of the global destructors. The
5057 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
5058 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
5059 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
5060 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
5061 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
5062 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
5063 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
5064 @code{exit}.
5065
5066 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
5067 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
5068 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
5069 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
5070 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
5071 runtime code expects to see.
5072
5073 @smallexample
5074 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
5075 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
5076 *(.ctors)
5077 LONG(0)
5078 __CTOR_END__ = .;
5079 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
5080 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
5081 *(.dtors)
5082 LONG(0)
5083 __DTOR_END__ = .;
5084 @end smallexample
5085
5086 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
5087 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
5088 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
5089 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
5090 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
5091 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
5092 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
5093 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
5094
5095 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
5096 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
5097 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
5098 scripts.
5099
5100 @end table
5101
5102 @node Output Section Discarding
5103 @subsection Output Section Discarding
5104 @cindex discarding sections
5105 @cindex sections, discarding
5106 @cindex removing sections
5107 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
5108 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
5109 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
5110 @smallexample
5111 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
5112 @end smallexample
5113 @noindent
5114 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
5115 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
5116 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
5117 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
5118 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
5119 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
5120 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
5121 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
5122 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
5123
5124 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
5125 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
5126 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
5127 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
5128 section is discarded.
5129
5130 @cindex /DISCARD/
5131 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
5132 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
5133 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
5134
5135 Note, sections that match the @samp{/DISCARD/} output section will be
5136 discarded even if they are in an ELF section group which has other
5137 members which are not being discarded. This is deliberate.
5138 Discarding takes precedence over grouping.
5139
5140 @node Output Section Attributes
5141 @subsection Output Section Attributes
5142 @cindex output section attributes
5143 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
5144 like this:
5145
5146 @smallexample
5147 @group
5148 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
5149 [AT(@var{lma})]
5150 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
5151 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
5152 [@var{constraint}]
5153 @{
5154 @var{output-section-command}
5155 @var{output-section-command}
5156 @dots{}
5157 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
5158 @end group
5159 @end smallexample
5160
5161 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
5162 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
5163 remaining section attributes.
5164
5165 @menu
5166 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
5167 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
5168 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
5169 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
5170 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
5171 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
5172 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5173 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5174 @end menu
5175
5176 @node Output Section Type
5177 @subsubsection Output Section Type
5178 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5179 parentheses. The following types are defined:
5180
5181 @table @code
5182 @item NOLOAD
5183 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5184 loaded into memory when the program is run.
5185 @item DSECT
5186 @itemx COPY
5187 @itemx INFO
5188 @itemx OVERLAY
5189 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5190 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5191 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5192 section when the program is run.
5193 @end table
5194
5195 @kindex NOLOAD
5196 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5197 @cindex loading, preventing
5198 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5199 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5200 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5201 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
5202 need to be loaded when the program is run.
5203 @smallexample
5204 @group
5205 SECTIONS @{
5206 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5207 @dots{}
5208 @}
5209 @end group
5210 @end smallexample
5211
5212 @node Output Section LMA
5213 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
5214 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
5215 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
5216 @cindex load address
5217 @cindex section load address
5218 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
5219 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5220 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5221 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5222 address is optional.
5223
5224 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5225 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5226 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5227 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5228 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
5229
5230 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
5231 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5232 load address:
5233
5234 @itemize @bullet
5235 @item
5236 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5237 the LMA address as well.
5238
5239 @item
5240 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5241
5242 @item
5243 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5244 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5245 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5246 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5247 the last section in the located region.
5248
5249 @item
5250 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5251 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5252
5253 @item
5254 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5255 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5256 @end itemize
5257
5258 @cindex ROM initialized data
5259 @cindex initialized data in ROM
5260 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5261 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5262 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5263 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5264 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5265 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5266 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5267 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5268
5269 @smallexample
5270 @group
5271 SECTIONS
5272 @{
5273 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
5274 .mdata 0x2000 :
5275 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5276 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5277 .bss 0x3000 :
5278 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5279 @}
5280 @end group
5281 @end smallexample
5282
5283 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5284 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5285 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5286 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5287 script.
5288
5289 @smallexample
5290 @group
5291 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5292 char *src = &_etext;
5293 char *dst = &_data;
5294
5295 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5296 while (dst < &_edata)
5297 *dst++ = *src++;
5298
5299 /* Zero bss. */
5300 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5301 *dst = 0;
5302 @end group
5303 @end smallexample
5304
5305 @node Forced Output Alignment
5306 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5307 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5308 @cindex forcing output section alignment
5309 @cindex output section alignment
5310 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5311 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5312 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5313
5314 @node Forced Input Alignment
5315 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5316 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5317 @cindex forcing input section alignment
5318 @cindex input section alignment
5319 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5320 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5321 sections, whether larger or smaller.
5322
5323 @node Output Section Constraint
5324 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5325 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5326 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5327 @cindex constraints on output sections
5328 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5329 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5330 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5331 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5332
5333 @node Output Section Region
5334 @subsubsection Output Section Region
5335 @kindex >@var{region}
5336 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
5337 @cindex memory regions and sections
5338 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5339 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5340
5341 Here is a simple example:
5342 @smallexample
5343 @group
5344 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5345 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5346 @end group
5347 @end smallexample
5348
5349 @node Output Section Phdr
5350 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5351 @kindex :@var{phdr}
5352 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5353 @cindex program headers and sections
5354 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5355 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5356 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5357 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5358 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5359 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5360
5361 Here is a simple example:
5362 @smallexample
5363 @group
5364 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5365 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5366 @end group
5367 @end smallexample
5368
5369 @node Output Section Fill
5370 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5371 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5372 @cindex section fill pattern
5373 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5374 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5375 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5376 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5377 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5378 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5379 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5380 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5381 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5382 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5383 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5384 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5385 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5386
5387 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5388 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5389
5390 Here is a simple example:
5391 @smallexample
5392 @group
5393 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5394 @end group
5395 @end smallexample
5396
5397 @node Overlay Description
5398 @subsection Overlay Description
5399 @kindex OVERLAY
5400 @cindex overlays
5401 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5402 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5403 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5404 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5405 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5406 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5407 than another.
5408
5409 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5410 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5411 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5412 command is as follows:
5413 @smallexample
5414 @group
5415 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5416 @{
5417 @var{secname1}
5418 @{
5419 @var{output-section-command}
5420 @var{output-section-command}
5421 @dots{}
5422 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5423 @var{secname2}
5424 @{
5425 @var{output-section-command}
5426 @var{output-section-command}
5427 @dots{}
5428 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5429 @dots{}
5430 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5431 @end group
5432 @end smallexample
5433
5434 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5435 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5436 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5437 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5438 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5439 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5440
5441 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5442 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5443
5444 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5445 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5446 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5447 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5448 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5449 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5450
5451 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5452 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5453 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5454 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5455 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5456
5457 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5458 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5459 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5460 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5461 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5462 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5463 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5464
5465 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5466 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5467
5468 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5469 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5470 @smallexample
5471 @group
5472 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5473 @{
5474 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5475 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5476 @}
5477 @end group
5478 @end smallexample
5479 @noindent
5480 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5481 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5482 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5483 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5484 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5485 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5486
5487 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5488 like the following.
5489
5490 @smallexample
5491 @group
5492 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5493 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5494 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5495 @end group
5496 @end smallexample
5497
5498 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5499 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5500 example could have been written identically as follows.
5501
5502 @smallexample
5503 @group
5504 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5505 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5506 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5507 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5508 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5509 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5510 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5511 @end group
5512 @end smallexample
5513
5514 @node MEMORY
5515 @section MEMORY Command
5516 @kindex MEMORY
5517 @cindex memory regions
5518 @cindex regions of memory
5519 @cindex allocating memory
5520 @cindex discontinuous memory
5521 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5522 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5523
5524 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5525 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5526 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5527 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5528 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5529 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5530 around to fit into the available regions.
5531
5532 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5533 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5534 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5535 @code{MEMORY} is:
5536 @smallexample
5537 @group
5538 MEMORY
5539 @{
5540 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5541 @dots{}
5542 @}
5543 @end group
5544 @end smallexample
5545
5546 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5547 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5548 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5549 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5550 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5551 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5552 command.
5553
5554 @cindex memory region attributes
5555 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5556 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5557 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5558 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5559 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5560 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5561 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5562
5563 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5564 @table @samp
5565 @item R
5566 Read-only section
5567 @item W
5568 Read/write section
5569 @item X
5570 Executable section
5571 @item A
5572 Allocatable section
5573 @item I
5574 Initialized section
5575 @item L
5576 Same as @samp{I}
5577 @item !
5578 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5579 @end table
5580
5581 If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5582 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5583 attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5584 unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5585 not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5586 string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5587 or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5588 the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
5589
5590 @kindex ORIGIN =
5591 @kindex o =
5592 @kindex org =
5593 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5594 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5595 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5596 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5597 @code{ORG}).
5598
5599 @kindex LENGTH =
5600 @kindex len =
5601 @kindex l =
5602 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5603 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5604 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5605 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5606
5607 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5608 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5609 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5610 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5611 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5612 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5613 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5614 region.
5615
5616 @smallexample
5617 @group
5618 MEMORY
5619 @{
5620 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5621 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5622 @}
5623 @end group
5624 @end smallexample
5625
5626 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5627 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5628 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5629 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5630 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5631 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5632 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5633 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5634 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5635
5636 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5637 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5638 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5639
5640 @smallexample
5641 @group
5642 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5643 @end group
5644 @end smallexample
5645
5646 @node PHDRS
5647 @section PHDRS Command
5648 @kindex PHDRS
5649 @cindex program headers
5650 @cindex ELF program headers
5651 @cindex program segments
5652 @cindex segments, ELF
5653 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5654 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5655 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5656 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5657
5658 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5659 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5660 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5661 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5662 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5663
5664 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5665 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5666 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5667 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5668 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5669
5670 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5671 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5672 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5673
5674 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5675 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5676
5677 @smallexample
5678 @group
5679 PHDRS
5680 @{
5681 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5682 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5683 @}
5684 @end group
5685 @end smallexample
5686
5687 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5688 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5689 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5690 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5691 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5692 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5693
5694 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5695 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5696 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5697 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5698 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5699 Section Phdr}.
5700
5701 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5702 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5703 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5704 contain the section.
5705
5706 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5707 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5708 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5709 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5710 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5711 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5712 segment at all.
5713
5714 @kindex FILEHDR
5715 @kindex PHDRS
5716 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5717 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5718 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5719 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5720 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5721 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5722 these keywords.
5723
5724 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5725 value of the keyword.
5726
5727 @table @asis
5728 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5729 Indicates an unused program header.
5730
5731 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5732 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5733 the file.
5734
5735 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5736 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5737
5738 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5739 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5740 found.
5741
5742 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5743 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5744
5745 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5746 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5747 ABI.
5748
5749 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5750 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5751
5752 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5753 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5754
5755 @item @var{expression}
5756 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5757 be used for types not defined above.
5758 @end table
5759
5760 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5761 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5762 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5763 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5764 output section attribute.
5765
5766 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5767 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5768 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5769 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5770 header.
5771
5772 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5773 headers used on a native ELF system.
5774
5775 @example
5776 @group
5777 PHDRS
5778 @{
5779 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5780 interp PT_INTERP ;
5781 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5782 data PT_LOAD ;
5783 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5784 @}
5785
5786 SECTIONS
5787 @{
5788 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5789 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5790 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5791 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5792 @dots{}
5793 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5794 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5795 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5796 @dots{}
5797 @}
5798 @end group
5799 @end example
5800
5801 @node VERSION
5802 @section VERSION Command
5803 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5804 @cindex symbol versions
5805 @cindex version script
5806 @cindex versions of symbols
5807 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5808 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5809 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5810 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5811 shared library.
5812
5813 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5814 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5815 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5816
5817 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5818 @smallexample
5819 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5820 @end smallexample
5821
5822 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5823 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5824 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5825 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5826 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5827 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5828 library.
5829
5830 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5831 examples.
5832
5833 @smallexample
5834 VERS_1.1 @{
5835 global:
5836 foo1;
5837 local:
5838 old*;
5839 original*;
5840 new*;
5841 @};
5842
5843 VERS_1.2 @{
5844 foo2;
5845 @} VERS_1.1;
5846
5847 VERS_2.0 @{
5848 bar1; bar2;
5849 extern "C++" @{
5850 ns::*;
5851 "f(int, double)";
5852 @};
5853 @} VERS_1.2;
5854 @end smallexample
5855
5856 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5857 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5858 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5859 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5860 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5861 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5862 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5863 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5864 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5865 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5866
5867 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5868 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5869 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5870
5871 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5872 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5873 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5874
5875 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5876 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5877 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5878 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5879 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5880 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5881 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5882 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5883 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5884
5885 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5886 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5887 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5888 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5889
5890 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5891 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5892 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5893 won't.
5894
5895 @smallexample
5896 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5897 @end smallexample
5898
5899 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5900 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5901 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5902 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5903 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5904 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5905 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5906 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5907 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5908 search for each symbol reference.
5909
5910 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5911 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5912 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5913 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5914 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5915 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5916 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5917 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5918 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5919
5920 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5921 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5922 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5923 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5924 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5925 @smallexample
5926 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5927 @end smallexample
5928 @noindent
5929 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5930 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5931 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5932 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5933 takes precedence over a version script.
5934
5935 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5936 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5937 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5938 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5939 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5940
5941 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5942 source file. Here is an example:
5943
5944 @smallexample
5945 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5946 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5947 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5948 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5949 @end smallexample
5950
5951 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5952 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5953 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5954 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5955
5956 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5957 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5958 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5959 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5960 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5961 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5962
5963 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5964 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5965 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5966 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5967
5968 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5969
5970 @smallexample
5971 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5972 @end smallexample
5973
5974 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5975 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5976 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5977 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5978 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5979
5980 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5981 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5982 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5983 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5984 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5985 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5986 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5987 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5988 expect when you upgrade.
5989
5990 @node Expressions
5991 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5992 @cindex expressions
5993 @cindex arithmetic
5994 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5995 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5996 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5997 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5998
5999 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
6000
6001 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
6002 expressions.
6003
6004 @menu
6005 * Constants:: Constants
6006 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
6007 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
6008 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
6009 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
6010 * Operators:: Operators
6011 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
6012 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
6013 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
6014 @end menu
6015
6016 @node Constants
6017 @subsection Constants
6018 @cindex integer notation
6019 @cindex constants in linker scripts
6020 All constants are integers.
6021
6022 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
6023 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
6024 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
6025 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
6026 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
6027 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
6028
6029 @cindex scaled integers
6030 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
6031 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
6032 @cindex suffixes for integers
6033 @cindex integer suffixes
6034 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
6035 constant by
6036 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6037 @ifnottex
6038 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6039 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
6040 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6041 @end ifnottex
6042 @tex
6043 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
6044 @end tex
6045 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6046 respectively. For example, the following
6047 all refer to the same quantity:
6048
6049 @smallexample
6050 _fourk_1 = 4K;
6051 _fourk_2 = 4096;
6052 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
6053 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
6054 @end smallexample
6055
6056 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
6057 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
6058
6059 @node Symbolic Constants
6060 @subsection Symbolic Constants
6061 @cindex symbolic constants
6062 @kindex CONSTANT
6063 It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of
6064 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
6065
6066 @table @code
6067 @item MAXPAGESIZE
6068 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
6069 The target's maximum page size.
6070
6071 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
6072 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
6073 The target's default page size.
6074 @end table
6075
6076 So for example:
6077
6078 @smallexample
6079 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
6080 @end smallexample
6081
6082 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
6083 supported by the target.
6084
6085 @node Symbols
6086 @subsection Symbol Names
6087 @cindex symbol names
6088 @cindex names
6089 @cindex quoted symbol names
6090 @kindex "
6091 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
6092 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
6093 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
6094 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
6095 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
6096 @smallexample
6097 "SECTION" = 9;
6098 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
6099 @end smallexample
6100
6101 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
6102 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
6103 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
6104
6105 @node Orphan Sections
6106 @subsection Orphan Sections
6107 @cindex orphan
6108 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
6109 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
6110 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
6111 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
6112 in which to place the orphaned input section.
6113
6114 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
6115 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
6116 placed at the end of that output section.
6117
6118 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
6119 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
6120 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
6121 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
6122 one new output section.
6123
6124 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
6125 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
6126 in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
6127 linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
6128 attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
6129 sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
6130 support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
6131
6132 The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
6133 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
6134 output sections an orphan is placed in.
6135
6136 @node Location Counter
6137 @subsection The Location Counter
6138 @kindex .
6139 @cindex dot
6140 @cindex location counter
6141 @cindex current output location
6142 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
6143 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
6144 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
6145 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
6146 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
6147
6148 @cindex holes
6149 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
6150 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
6151 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
6152 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
6153 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
6154
6155 @smallexample
6156 SECTIONS
6157 @{
6158 output :
6159 @{
6160 file1(.text)
6161 . = . + 1000;
6162 file2(.text)
6163 . += 1000;
6164 file3(.text)
6165 @} = 0x12345678;
6166 @}
6167 @end smallexample
6168 @noindent
6169 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
6170 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
6171 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
6172 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
6173 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
6174 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6175
6176 @cindex dot inside sections
6177 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6178 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
6179 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
6180 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6181 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6182 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6183
6184 @smallexample
6185 SECTIONS
6186 @{
6187 . = 0x100
6188 .text: @{
6189 *(.text)
6190 . = 0x200
6191 @}
6192 . = 0x500
6193 .data: @{
6194 *(.data)
6195 . += 0x600
6196 @}
6197 @}
6198 @end smallexample
6199
6200 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6201 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6202 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6203 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6204 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6205 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6206 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6207 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6208
6209 @cindex dot outside sections
6210 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6211 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6212 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6213
6214 @smallexample
6215 SECTIONS
6216 @{
6217 start_of_text = . ;
6218 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6219 end_of_text = . ;
6220
6221 start_of_data = . ;
6222 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6223 end_of_data = . ;
6224 @}
6225 @end smallexample
6226
6227 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6228 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6229 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6230 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6231 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6232 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6233 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6234 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6235 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6236 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6237 as follows:
6238
6239 @smallexample
6240 SECTIONS
6241 @{
6242 start_of_text = . ;
6243 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6244 end_of_text = . ;
6245
6246 start_of_data = . ;
6247 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6248 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6249 end_of_data = . ;
6250 @}
6251 @end smallexample
6252
6253 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6254 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6255 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6256 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6257 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6258 section. So you could write:
6259
6260 @smallexample
6261 SECTIONS
6262 @{
6263 start_of_text = . ;
6264 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6265 end_of_text = . ;
6266
6267 . = . ;
6268 start_of_data = . ;
6269 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6270 end_of_data = . ;
6271 @}
6272 @end smallexample
6273
6274 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6275 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6276
6277 @need 2000
6278 @node Operators
6279 @subsection Operators
6280 @cindex operators for arithmetic
6281 @cindex arithmetic operators
6282 @cindex precedence in expressions
6283 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6284 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6285 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6286 @ifnottex
6287 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6288 @smallexample
6289 precedence associativity Operators Notes
6290 (highest)
6291 1 left ! - ~ (1)
6292 2 left * / %
6293 3 left + -
6294 4 left >> <<
6295 5 left == != > < <= >=
6296 6 left &
6297 7 left |
6298 8 left &&
6299 9 left ||
6300 10 right ? :
6301 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6302 (lowest)
6303 @end smallexample
6304 Notes:
6305 (1) Prefix operators
6306 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
6307 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6308 @end ifnottex
6309 @tex
6310 \vskip \baselineskip
6311 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6312 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6313 \hrule
6314 \halign
6315 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6316 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6317 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6318 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6319 \noalign{\hrule}
6320 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6321 &highest&&&&&\cr
6322 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6323 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6324 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6325 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6326 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6327 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6328 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
6329 &7&&left&&|&\cr
6330 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6331 &9&&left&&||&\cr
6332 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
6333 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6334 &lowest&&&&&\cr
6335 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6336 \hrule}
6337 @end tex
6338 @iftex
6339 {
6340 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6341 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6342 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6343 }
6344 @end iftex
6345 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6346
6347 @node Evaluation
6348 @subsection Evaluation
6349 @cindex lazy evaluation
6350 @cindex expression evaluation order
6351 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6352 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6353
6354 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6355 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6356 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6357 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6358
6359 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6360 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6361 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6362 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6363
6364 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6365 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6366 allocation.
6367
6368 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6369 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6370
6371 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6372 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6373 following
6374 @smallexample
6375 @group
6376 SECTIONS
6377 @{
6378 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6379 @{ *(.text) @}
6380 @}
6381 @end group
6382 @end smallexample
6383 @noindent
6384 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6385 address}.
6386
6387 @node Expression Section
6388 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6389 @cindex expression sections
6390 @cindex absolute expressions
6391 @cindex relative expressions
6392 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6393 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6394 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6395 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6396 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6397 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6398 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6399 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6400 operations.
6401
6402 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6403 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6404 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6405 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6406 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6407 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6408 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6409 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6410 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6411 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6412 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6413 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6414 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6415 everywhere.
6416
6417 In the following simple example,
6418
6419 @smallexample
6420 @group
6421 SECTIONS
6422 @{
6423 . = 0x100;
6424 __executable_start = 0x100;
6425 .data :
6426 @{
6427 . = 0x10;
6428 __data_start = 0x10;
6429 *(.data)
6430 @}
6431 @dots{}
6432 @}
6433 @end group
6434 @end smallexample
6435
6436 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6437 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6438 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6439 section in the second two assignments.
6440
6441 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6442 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6443
6444 @itemize @bullet
6445 @item
6446 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6447 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6448 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6449 @item
6450 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6451 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6452 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6453 @item
6454 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6455 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6456 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6457 before applying the operator.
6458 @end itemize
6459
6460 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6461
6462 @itemize @bullet
6463 @item
6464 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6465 @item
6466 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6467 @item
6468 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6469 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6470 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6471 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6472 but an absolute address otherwise.
6473 @item
6474 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6475 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6476 section as the relative operand(s).
6477 @item
6478 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6479 conversions) is an absolute address.
6480 @end itemize
6481
6482 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6483 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6484 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6485 section @samp{.data}:
6486 @smallexample
6487 SECTIONS
6488 @{
6489 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6490 @}
6491 @end smallexample
6492 @noindent
6493 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6494 @samp{.data} section.
6495
6496 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6497 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6498
6499 @node Builtin Functions
6500 @subsection Builtin Functions
6501 @cindex functions in expressions
6502 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6503 use in linker script expressions.
6504
6505 @table @code
6506 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6507 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6508 @cindex expression, absolute
6509 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6510 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6511 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6512 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6513
6514 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6515 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6516 @cindex section address in expression
6517 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6518 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6519 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6520 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6521 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6522 the other two will be absolute:
6523 @smallexample
6524 @group
6525 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6526 .output1 :
6527 @{
6528 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6529 @dots{}
6530 @}
6531 .output :
6532 @{
6533 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6534 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6535 @}
6536 @dots{} @}
6537 @end group
6538 @end smallexample
6539
6540 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6541 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6542 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6543 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6544 @cindex round up location counter
6545 @cindex align location counter
6546 @cindex round up expression
6547 @cindex align expression
6548 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6549 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6550 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6551 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6552 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6553 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6554
6555 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6556 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6557 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6558 input sections:
6559 @smallexample
6560 @group
6561 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6562 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6563 *(.data)
6564 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6565 @}
6566 @dots{} @}
6567 @end group
6568 @end smallexample
6569 @noindent
6570 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6571 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6572 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6573 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6574
6575 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6576
6577 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6578 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6579 @cindex section alignment
6580 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6581 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6582 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6583 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6584 value in that section.
6585 @smallexample
6586 @group
6587 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6588 .output @{
6589 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6590 @dots{}
6591 @}
6592 @dots{} @}
6593 @end group
6594 @end smallexample
6595
6596 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6597 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6598 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6599 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6600 section.
6601
6602 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6603 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6604 This is equivalent to either
6605 @smallexample
6606 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6607 @end smallexample
6608 or
6609 @smallexample
6610 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6611 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6612 @end smallexample
6613 @noindent
6614 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6615 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6616 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6617 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6618 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6619 bytes in the on-disk file.
6620
6621 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6622 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6623 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6624 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6625 running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6626 that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6627 page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
6628
6629 @noindent
6630 Example:
6631 @smallexample
6632 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6633 @end smallexample
6634
6635 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6636 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6637 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6638 evaluation purposes.
6639
6640 @smallexample
6641 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6642 @end smallexample
6643
6644 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6645 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6646 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6647 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6648 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6649 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6650 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6651 argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6652 script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6653 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6654 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6655 section alignment.
6656
6657 @smallexample
6658 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6659 @end smallexample
6660
6661 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6662 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6663 @cindex symbol defaults
6664 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6665 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6666 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6667 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6668 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6669 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6670 existed, its value is preserved:
6671
6672 @smallexample
6673 @group
6674 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6675 .text : @{
6676 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6677 @dots{}
6678 @}
6679 @dots{}
6680 @}
6681 @end group
6682 @end smallexample
6683
6684 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6685 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6686 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6687
6688 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6689 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6690 @cindex section load address in expression
6691 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6692 Section LMA}).
6693
6694 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6695 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6696 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6697 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6698
6699 @kindex MAX
6700 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6701 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6702
6703 @kindex MIN
6704 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6705 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6706
6707 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6708 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6709 @cindex unallocated address, next
6710 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6711 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6712 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6713 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6714
6715 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6716 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6717 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6718
6719 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6720 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6721 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6722 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6723 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6724 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6725 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6726 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6727 name.
6728
6729 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6730 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6731 @cindex section size
6732 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6733 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6734 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6735 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6736 @smallexample
6737 @group
6738 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6739 .output @{
6740 .start = . ;
6741 @dots{}
6742 .end = . ;
6743 @}
6744 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6745 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6746 @dots{} @}
6747 @end group
6748 @end smallexample
6749
6750 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6751 @itemx sizeof_headers
6752 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6753 @cindex header size
6754 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6755 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6756 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6757 choose, to facilitate paging.
6758
6759 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6760 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6761 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6762 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6763 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6764 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6765 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6766 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6767 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6768 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6769 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6770 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6771 @end table
6772
6773 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6774 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6775 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6776 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6777 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6778 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6779 linker will report an error.
6780
6781 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6782
6783 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6784 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6785 commands.
6786
6787 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6788 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6789 read. This can affect archive searching.
6790
6791 @ifset GENERIC
6792 @node Machine Dependent
6793 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6794
6795 @cindex machine dependencies
6796 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6797 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6798 functionality are not listed.
6799
6800 @menu
6801 @ifset H8300
6802 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6803 @end ifset
6804 @ifset M68HC11
6805 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6806 @end ifset
6807 @ifset ARM
6808 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6809 @end ifset
6810 @ifset HPPA
6811 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6812 @end ifset
6813 @ifset M68K
6814 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6815 @end ifset
6816 @ifset MIPS
6817 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6818 @end ifset
6819 @ifset MMIX
6820 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6821 @end ifset
6822 @ifset MSP430
6823 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6824 @end ifset
6825 @ifset NDS32
6826 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6827 @end ifset
6828 @ifset NIOSII
6829 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6830 @end ifset
6831 @ifset POWERPC
6832 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6833 @end ifset
6834 @ifset POWERPC64
6835 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6836 @end ifset
6837 @ifset S/390
6838 * S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6839 @end ifset
6840 @ifset SPU
6841 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6842 @end ifset
6843 @ifset TICOFF
6844 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6845 @end ifset
6846 @ifset WIN32
6847 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6848 @end ifset
6849 @ifset XTENSA
6850 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6851 @end ifset
6852 @end menu
6853 @end ifset
6854
6855 @ifset H8300
6856 @ifclear GENERIC
6857 @raisesections
6858 @end ifclear
6859
6860 @node H8/300
6861 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6862
6863 @cindex H8/300 support
6864 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6865 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6866
6867 @table @emph
6868 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6869 @item relaxing address modes
6870 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6871 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6872 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6873 respectively.
6874
6875 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6876 @item synthesizing instructions
6877 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6878 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6879 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6880 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6881 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6882 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6883 top page of memory).
6884
6885 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6886 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6887 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6888 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6889 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6890 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6891 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6892
6893 @item bit manipulation instructions
6894 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6895 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6896 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6897 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6898 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6899 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6900 the top page of memory).
6901
6902 @item system control instructions
6903 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6904 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6905 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6906 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6907 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6908 the top page of memory).
6909 @end table
6910
6911 @ifclear GENERIC
6912 @lowersections
6913 @end ifclear
6914 @end ifset
6915
6916 @ifclear GENERIC
6917 @ifset Renesas
6918 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6919 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6920 @node Renesas
6921 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6922
6923 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6924 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6925 options are required for these chips.
6926 @end ifset
6927 @end ifclear
6928
6929 @ifset ARM
6930 @ifclear GENERIC
6931 @raisesections
6932 @end ifclear
6933
6934 @ifset M68HC11
6935 @ifclear GENERIC
6936 @raisesections
6937 @end ifclear
6938
6939 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6940 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6941
6942 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6943
6944 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6945
6946 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6947 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6948
6949 @table @emph
6950 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6951 @item relaxing address modes
6952 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6953 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6954 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6955 respectively.
6956
6957 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6958 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6959 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6960
6961 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6962 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6963 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6964 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6965 @code{bset} instructions.
6966
6967 @end table
6968
6969 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6970
6971 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6972 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6973 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6974 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6975 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6976 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6977 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6978 point to the function trampoline.
6979
6980 @ifclear GENERIC
6981 @lowersections
6982 @end ifclear
6983 @end ifset
6984
6985 @node ARM
6986 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6987
6988 @cindex ARM interworking support
6989 @kindex --support-old-code
6990 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6991 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6992 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6993 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6994 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6995 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
6996 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6997 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6998 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6999 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
7000
7001 @cindex thumb entry point
7002 @cindex entry point, thumb
7003 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
7004 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
7005 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
7006 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
7007 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
7008 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
7009
7010 @cindex PE import table prefixing
7011 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
7012 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
7013 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
7014 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
7015 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
7016
7017 @cindex BE8
7018 @kindex --be8
7019 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
7020 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
7021 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
7022 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
7023 little-endian code.
7024
7025 @cindex TARGET1
7026 @kindex --target1-rel
7027 @kindex --target1-abs
7028 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
7029 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
7030 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
7031 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
7032
7033 @cindex TARGET2
7034 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
7035 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
7036 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
7037 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
7038 @table @samp
7039 @item rel
7040 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
7041 @item abs
7042 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
7043 @item got-rel
7044 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
7045 @end table
7046
7047 @cindex FIX_V4BX
7048 @kindex --fix-v4bx
7049 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
7050 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
7051 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
7052 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
7053
7054 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
7055 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
7056 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
7057
7058 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
7059 relocations are ignored.
7060
7061 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
7062 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
7063 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
7064 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
7065
7066 @smallexample
7067 TST rM, #1
7068 MOVEQ PC, rM
7069 BX Rn
7070 @end smallexample
7071
7072 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
7073 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
7074 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
7075
7076 @cindex USE_BLX
7077 @kindex --use-blx
7078 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
7079 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
7080 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
7081 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
7082 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
7083
7084 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
7085 specify it if you are using that target.
7086
7087 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
7088 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
7089 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
7090 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
7091 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
7092 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
7093 the support code can read the intended values.
7094
7095 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
7096 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
7097 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
7098 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
7099 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
7100 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
7101
7102 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
7103 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
7104 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
7105 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
7106 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
7107 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
7108
7109 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7110 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7111 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
7112 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
7113 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
7114 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
7115 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
7116
7117 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
7118 @kindex --fix-arm1176
7119 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
7120 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
7121 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
7122 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
7123 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
7124
7125 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
7126 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
7127 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
7128
7129 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
7130 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
7131
7132 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
7133 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
7134 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
7135 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
7136 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
7137 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
7138 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
7139 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
7140
7141 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
7142 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
7143
7144 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
7145 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
7146 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
7147 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
7148 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
7149
7150 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7151 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7152 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
7153 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
7154 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
7155 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
7156
7157 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
7158 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
7159
7160 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
7161 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
7162 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7163 occurs.
7164
7165 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
7166 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
7167 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
7168 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7169 occurs.
7170
7171 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
7172 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
7173 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7174 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7175 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7176 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7177 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7178 not be diagnosed.
7179
7180 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7181 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7182 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7183 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7184 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7185 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7186 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
7187
7188 @cindex PIC_VENEER
7189 @kindex --pic-veneer
7190 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7191 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7192 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7193 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7194
7195 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7196 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7197 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7198 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7199 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7200 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
7201 controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
7202 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
7203 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
7204 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7205 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7206 where they should be placed.
7207
7208 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7209 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
7210 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
7211 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7212 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7213 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7214 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7215 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7216 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7217 from the input sections.
7218
7219 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7220 @samp{N = +1}.
7221
7222 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7223 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7224 otherwise.
7225
7226 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7227 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7228 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7229 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7230
7231 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7232
7233 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7234 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7235 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7236 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7237
7238 Please contact ARM for further details.
7239
7240 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7241 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7242 @cindex Merging exidx entries
7243 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7244
7245 @kindex --long-plt
7246 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7247 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7248 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7249 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7250
7251 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7252 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
7253 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7254 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7255
7256 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
7257 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7258 Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
7259 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7260 veneers in memory.
7261
7262 @kindex --cmse-implib
7263 @cindex Secure gateway import library
7264 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7265 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7266 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7267 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7268
7269 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7270 @cindex Input import library
7271 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7272 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7273 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7274 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7275 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7276 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7277 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7278 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7279 specified.
7280
7281 @ifclear GENERIC
7282 @lowersections
7283 @end ifclear
7284 @end ifset
7285
7286 @ifset HPPA
7287 @ifclear GENERIC
7288 @raisesections
7289 @end ifclear
7290
7291 @node HPPA ELF32
7292 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7293 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7294 @kindex --multi-subspace
7295 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7296 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7297 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7298 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7299 multiple sub-spaces.
7300
7301 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7302 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7303 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7304 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7305 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7306 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7307 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7308 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7309 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7310 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7311 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7312 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7313 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7314 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7315 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7316 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7317
7318 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7319 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7320 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7321 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7322
7323 @ifclear GENERIC
7324 @lowersections
7325 @end ifclear
7326 @end ifset
7327
7328 @ifset M68K
7329 @ifclear GENERIC
7330 @raisesections
7331 @end ifclear
7332
7333 @node M68K
7334 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7335
7336 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7337 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7338 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7339 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7340 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7341 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7342 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7343 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7344 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7345 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7346 support such GOTs.
7347 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7348 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7349 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7350 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7351
7352 @ifclear GENERIC
7353 @lowersections
7354 @end ifclear
7355 @end ifset
7356
7357 @ifset MIPS
7358 @ifclear GENERIC
7359 @raisesections
7360 @end ifclear
7361
7362 @node MIPS
7363 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7364
7365 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7366 @kindex --insn32
7367 @kindex --no-insn32
7368 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7369 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7370 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7371 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7372 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7373 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7374
7375 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7376 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7377 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7378 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7379 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7380 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7381 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7382 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7383 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7384 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7385 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7386 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7387
7388 @ifclear GENERIC
7389 @lowersections
7390 @end ifclear
7391 @end ifset
7392
7393 @ifset MMIX
7394 @ifclear GENERIC
7395 @raisesections
7396 @end ifclear
7397
7398 @node MMIX
7399 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7400 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7401 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7402 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7403 can translate between the two formats.
7404
7405 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7406 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7407 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7408 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7409 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7410 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7411 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7412 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7413
7414 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7415 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7416 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7417 of a section.
7418
7419 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7420 are left out from an mmo file.
7421
7422 @ifclear GENERIC
7423 @lowersections
7424 @end ifclear
7425 @end ifset
7426
7427 @ifset MSP430
7428 @ifclear GENERIC
7429 @raisesections
7430 @end ifclear
7431
7432 @node MSP430
7433 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7434 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7435 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7436 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7437
7438 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7439 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7440
7441 @table @code
7442 @item @samp{.vectors}
7443 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7444
7445 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7446 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7447 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7448
7449 @item @samp{.infomem}
7450 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7451 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7452
7453 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7454 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7455 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7456
7457 @item @samp{.noinit}
7458 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7459
7460 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7461 @end table
7462
7463 @table @option
7464 @cindex MSP430 Options
7465 @kindex --code-region
7466 @item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7467 This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7468 argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7469 using this option.
7470
7471 @kindex --data-region
7472 @item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7473 This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7474 [either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7475 for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7476
7477 @kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7478 @item --disable-sec-transformation
7479 Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7480 and @code{--data-region} options.
7481 This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7482 wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7483 not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7484 @end table
7485
7486 @ifclear GENERIC
7487 @lowersections
7488 @end ifclear
7489 @end ifset
7490
7491 @ifset NDS32
7492 @ifclear GENERIC
7493 @raisesections
7494 @end ifclear
7495
7496 @node NDS32
7497 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7498 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7499 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7500 relaxes objects according to these options.
7501
7502 @table @code
7503 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7504 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7505
7506 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7507 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7508
7509 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7510 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7511
7512 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7513 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7514
7515 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7516 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7517
7518 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7519 Update the existing EX9 table.
7520
7521 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7522 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7523
7524 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7525 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7526
7527 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7528 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7529
7530 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7531 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7532 @end table
7533
7534 @ifclear GENERIC
7535 @lowersections
7536 @end ifclear
7537 @end ifset
7538
7539 @ifset NIOSII
7540 @ifclear GENERIC
7541 @raisesections
7542 @end ifclear
7543
7544 @node Nios II
7545 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7546 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7547 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7548
7549 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7550 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7551 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7552 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7553 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7554 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7555 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7556 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7557 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7558 larger than 256MB.
7559
7560 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7561 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7562 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7563 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7564 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7565 register as a temporary.
7566
7567 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7568 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7569 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7570
7571 @ifclear GENERIC
7572 @lowersections
7573 @end ifclear
7574 @end ifset
7575
7576 @ifset POWERPC
7577 @ifclear GENERIC
7578 @raisesections
7579 @end ifclear
7580
7581 @node PowerPC ELF32
7582 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7583 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7584 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7585 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7586 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7587 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7588 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7589 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7590 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7591 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7592 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7593 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7594 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7595
7596 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7597 @table @option
7598 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7599 @kindex --bss-plt
7600 @item --bss-plt
7601 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7602 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7603 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7604 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7605 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7606 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7607 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7608 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7609
7610 @kindex --secure-plt
7611 @item --secure-plt
7612 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7613 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7614 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7615 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7616 style BSS PLT.
7617
7618 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7619 @kindex --sdata-got
7620 @item --sdata-got
7621 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7622 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7623 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7624 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7625 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7626 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7627 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7628 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7629 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7630 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7631 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7632 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7633
7634 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7635 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7636 @item --emit-stub-syms
7637 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7638 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7639
7640 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7641 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7642 @item --no-tls-optimize
7643 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7644 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7645 disable the optimization.
7646 @end table
7647
7648 @ifclear GENERIC
7649 @lowersections
7650 @end ifclear
7651 @end ifset
7652
7653 @ifset POWERPC64
7654 @ifclear GENERIC
7655 @raisesections
7656 @end ifclear
7657
7658 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7659 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7660
7661 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7662 @table @option
7663 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7664 @kindex --stub-group-size
7665 @item --stub-group-size
7666 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7667 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7668 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7669 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7670 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7671 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7672 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7673 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7674 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7675 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7676 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7677 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7678 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7679 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7680
7681 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7682 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7683 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7684 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7685
7686 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7687 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7688 @item --emit-stub-syms
7689 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7690 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7691
7692 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7693 @kindex --dotsyms
7694 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7695 @item --dotsyms
7696 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7697 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7698 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7699 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7700 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7701 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7702 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7703 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7704 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7705 feature.
7706
7707 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7708 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7709 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7710 @item --save-restore-funcs
7711 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7712 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7713 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7714 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7715 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7716 link.
7717
7718 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7719 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7720 @item --no-tls-optimize
7721 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7722 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7723 disable the optimization.
7724
7725 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7726 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7727 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7728 @kindex --tls-get-addr-regsave
7729 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-regsave
7730 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7731 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7732 These options control how PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7733 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7734 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7735 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7736 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables
7737 generation of the stub when glibc advertises the availability of
7738 __tls_get_addr_opt.
7739 Using @option{--tls-get-addr-optimize} with an older glibc won't do
7740 much besides slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking
7741 an application against an older glibc with the expectation that it
7742 will normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7743 @option{--tls-get-addr-regsave} forces generation of a stub that saves
7744 and restores volatile registers around the call into glibc. Normally,
7745 this is done when the linker detects a call to __tls_get_addr_desc.
7746 Such calls then go via the register saving stub to __tls_get_addr_opt.
7747 @option{--no-tls-get-addr-regsave} disables generation of the
7748 register saves.
7749
7750 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7751 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7752 @item --no-opd-optimize
7753 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7754 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7755 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7756 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7757
7758 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7759 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7760 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7761 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7762 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7763 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7764 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7765
7766 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7767 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7768 @item --no-toc-optimize
7769 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7770 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7771 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7772 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7773 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7774 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7775 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7776 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7777 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7778 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7779 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7780 optimization.
7781
7782 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7783 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7784 @item --no-multi-toc
7785 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7786 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7787 where TOC
7788 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7789 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7790 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7791 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7792 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7793 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7794 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7795 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7796
7797 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7798 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7799 @item --no-toc-sort
7800 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7801 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7802 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7803 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7804 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7805 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7806 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7807 off this feature.
7808
7809 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7810 @kindex --plt-align
7811 @kindex --no-plt-align
7812 @item --plt-align
7813 @itemx --no-plt-align
7814 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7815 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7816 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7817 specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7818 specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7819 if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7820 PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
7821
7822 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7823 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7824 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7825 @item --plt-static-chain
7826 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7827 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7828 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7829 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7830
7831 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7832 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7833 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7834 @item --plt-thread-safe
7835 @itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
7836 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7837 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7838 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7839 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7840 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7841 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7842 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7843 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7844 default behaviour.
7845
7846 @cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7847 @kindex --plt-localentry
7848 @kindex --no-plt-localentry
7849 @item --plt-localentry
7850 @itemx --no-localentry
7851 ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7852 ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7853 (the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7854 Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7855 or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7856 functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7857 in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
7858 interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7859 including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7860 to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7861 complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7862 care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
7863 @end table
7864
7865 @ifclear GENERIC
7866 @lowersections
7867 @end ifclear
7868 @end ifset
7869
7870 @ifset S/390
7871 @ifclear GENERIC
7872 @raisesections
7873 @end ifclear
7874
7875 @node S/390 ELF
7876 @section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7877
7878 @cindex S/390 ELF options
7879 @table @option
7880
7881 @cindex S/390
7882 @kindex --s390-pgste
7883 @item --s390-pgste
7884 This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7885 segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7886 binaries marked that way.
7887 @end table
7888
7889 @ifclear GENERIC
7890 @lowersections
7891 @end ifclear
7892 @end ifset
7893
7894 @ifset SPU
7895 @ifclear GENERIC
7896 @raisesections
7897 @end ifclear
7898
7899 @node SPU ELF
7900 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7901
7902 @cindex SPU ELF options
7903 @table @option
7904
7905 @cindex SPU plugins
7906 @kindex --plugin
7907 @item --plugin
7908 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7909
7910 @cindex SPU overlays
7911 @kindex --no-overlays
7912 @item --no-overlays
7913 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7914 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7915 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7916 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7917
7918 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7919 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7920 @item --emit-stub-syms
7921 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7922 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7923
7924 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7925 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7926 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7927 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7928 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7929 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7930
7931 @cindex SPU local store size
7932 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7933 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7934 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7935 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7936 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7937
7938 @cindex SPU
7939 @kindex --stack-analysis
7940 @item --stack-analysis
7941 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7942 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7943 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7944 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7945 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7946 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7947 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7948 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7949 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7950 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7951 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7952 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7953 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7954 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7955 and calls will be given.
7956
7957 @cindex SPU
7958 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7959 @item --emit-stack-syms
7960 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7961 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7962 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7963 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7964 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7965 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7966 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7967 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7968 @end table
7969
7970 @ifclear GENERIC
7971 @lowersections
7972 @end ifclear
7973 @end ifset
7974
7975 @ifset TICOFF
7976 @ifclear GENERIC
7977 @raisesections
7978 @end ifclear
7979
7980 @node TI COFF
7981 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7982 @cindex TI COFF versions
7983 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7984 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7985 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7986 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7987 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7988 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7989
7990 @ifclear GENERIC
7991 @lowersections
7992 @end ifclear
7993 @end ifset
7994
7995 @ifset WIN32
7996 @ifclear GENERIC
7997 @raisesections
7998 @end ifclear
7999
8000 @node WIN32
8001 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
8002
8003 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
8004 See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
8005 command-line options mentioned here.
8006
8007 @table @emph
8008 @cindex import libraries
8009 @item import libraries
8010 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
8011 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
8012 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
8013 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
8014 support for creating such libraries provided with the
8015 @samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
8016
8017 @item exporting DLL symbols
8018 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
8019 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
8020
8021 @table @emph
8022 @item using auto-export functionality
8023 @cindex using auto-export functionality
8024 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
8025 which is controlled by the following command-line options:
8026
8027 @itemize
8028 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
8029 @item --exclude-symbols
8030 @item --exclude-libs
8031 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
8032 @item --version-script
8033 @end itemize
8034
8035 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
8036 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
8037 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
8038 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
8039 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
8040 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
8041 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
8042 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
8043
8044 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
8045 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
8046 if either of the following are true:
8047
8048 @itemize
8049 @item A DEF file is used.
8050 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
8051 @end itemize
8052
8053 @item using a DEF file
8054 @cindex using a DEF file
8055 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
8056 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
8057 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
8058 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
8059 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
8060
8061 @example
8062 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
8063 @end example
8064
8065 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
8066 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8067
8068 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
8069
8070 @example
8071 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
8072
8073 EXPORTS
8074 foo
8075 bar
8076 _bar = bar
8077 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
8078 var1 DATA
8079 doo = foo == foo2
8080 eoo DATA == var1
8081 @end example
8082
8083 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
8084 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
8085 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
8086 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
8087 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
8088 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
8089 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
8090 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
8091 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
8092
8093 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
8094 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
8095 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
8096
8097 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
8098 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
8099 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
8100 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
8101
8102 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
8103 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
8104 non-default base address for the image.
8105
8106 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
8107 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
8108 filename specified on the command line.
8109
8110 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
8111
8112 @example
8113 EXPORTS
8114 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
8115 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
8116 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
8117 @end example
8118
8119 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
8120 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
8121 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
8122 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
8123 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
8124 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
8125 string in import/export table for the symbol.
8126
8127 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
8128
8129 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
8130 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
8131 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
8132 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
8133 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
8134
8135 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
8136 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
8137 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
8138 @code{*_imp__foo}).
8139
8140 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
8141 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
8142 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
8143 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
8144 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
8145 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
8146 application will behave unexpectedly.
8147
8148 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
8149 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
8150 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
8151 API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
8152 the DLL without an import library.
8153
8154 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
8155 other DEF file statements
8156
8157 @cindex creating a DEF file
8158 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
8159 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
8160
8161 @item Using decorations
8162 @cindex Using decorations
8163 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
8164 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
8165 declared as:
8166
8167 @example
8168 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
8169 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
8170 @end example
8171
8172 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
8173 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
8174 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
8175 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8176
8177 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
8178 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
8179 instead:
8180
8181 @example
8182 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8183 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8184 @end example
8185
8186 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8187 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
8188 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8189 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
8190 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
8191 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8192 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
8193 information.
8194 @end table
8195
8196 @cindex automatic data imports
8197 @item automatic data imports
8198 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
8199 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
8200 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
8201 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
8202 code to these platforms, especially for large
8203 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
8204 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
8205 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
8206 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
8207 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8208 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8209 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8210 trigger the feature's use.
8211
8212 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
8213 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8214
8215 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
8216 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8217
8218 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8219 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8220 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
8221 below.
8222
8223 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
8224 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8225 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8226 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8227 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8228 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
8229 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
8230 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
8231 references.
8232
8233 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8234 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8235 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8236 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8237 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8238 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
8239 run without error on an older system.
8240
8241 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8242 enabled as needed.
8243
8244 @cindex direct linking to a dll
8245 @item direct linking to a dll
8246 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8247 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
8248 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
8249 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
8250 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8251 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8252 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
8253 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
8254 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
8255 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8256
8257 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
8258 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
8259 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
8260 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8261 select the dll instead of an import library.
8262
8263
8264 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8265 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
8266
8267 @example
8268 libxxx.dll.a
8269 xxx.dll.a
8270 libxxx.a
8271 xxx.lib
8272 libxxx.lib
8273 cygxxx.dll (*)
8274 libxxx.dll
8275 xxx.dll
8276 @end example
8277
8278 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8279
8280 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8281 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8282 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8283 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
8284 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8285
8286 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8287 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
8288 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8289 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8290 could coexist on the same machine.
8291
8292 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8293 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
8294 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
8295
8296 @example
8297 bin/
8298 cygxxx.dll
8299 lib/
8300 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
8301 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
8302 @end example
8303
8304 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8305 done two ways:
8306
8307 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8308 @example
8309 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
8310 @end example
8311
8312 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8313 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8314 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8315 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8316
8317 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8318 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8319 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8320 making the app/dll.
8321
8322 @example
8323 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
8324 @end example
8325
8326 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8327
8328 @example
8329 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8330 @end example
8331
8332 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8333 perfectly legal
8334
8335 @example
8336 bin/
8337 cygxxx-5.dll
8338 lib/
8339 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8340 @end example
8341
8342 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8343 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8344 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8345
8346 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8347 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8348
8349 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8350 work with auto-imported data.
8351
8352 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8353 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8354 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8355 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8356 possible to do this without an import lib.
8357
8358 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8359 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8360 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8361 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8362
8363 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8364 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8365 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8366 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8367 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8368 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8369 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8370
8371 @item symbol aliasing
8372 @table @emph
8373 @item adding additional names
8374 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8375 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8376 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8377 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8378 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8379
8380 @example
8381 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8382
8383 EXPORTS
8384 foo
8385 _foo = foo
8386 @end example
8387
8388 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8389
8390 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8391 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8392
8393 @example
8394 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8395 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8396 @end example
8397
8398 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8399 symbols.
8400
8401 @item renaming symbols
8402 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8403 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8404 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8405 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8406 created). In the following example:
8407
8408 @example
8409 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8410
8411 EXPORTS
8412 _foo = foo
8413 @end example
8414
8415 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8416 @samp{_foo}.
8417 @end table
8418
8419 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8420 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
8421 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8422 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8423 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8424 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8425 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8426 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8427 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8428 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8429 which is probably not what you wanted.
8430
8431 @cindex weak externals
8432 @item weak externals
8433 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8434 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8435 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8436 are three variants of weak externals:
8437 @itemize
8438 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8439 called lazy externals.
8440 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8441 This form is not presently implemented.
8442 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8443 implemented.
8444 @end itemize
8445 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8446 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8447 uses a default value.
8448
8449 @cindex aligned common symbols
8450 @item aligned common symbols
8451 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8452 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8453 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8454 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8455 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8456 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8457 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8458 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8459
8460 @end table
8461
8462 @ifclear GENERIC
8463 @lowersections
8464 @end ifclear
8465 @end ifset
8466
8467 @ifset XTENSA
8468 @ifclear GENERIC
8469 @raisesections
8470 @end ifclear
8471
8472 @node Xtensa
8473 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8474
8475 @cindex Xtensa processors
8476 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8477 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8478 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8479 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8480 example, with the command:
8481
8482 @smallexample
8483 SECTIONS
8484 @{
8485 .text : @{
8486 *(.literal .text)
8487 @}
8488 @}
8489 @end smallexample
8490
8491 @noindent
8492 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8493 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8494 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8495 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8496 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8497 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8498 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8499
8500 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8501 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8502 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8503 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8504 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8505 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8506 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8507 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8508 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8509 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8510 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8511 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8512
8513 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8514 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8515 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8516 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8517 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8518 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8519 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8520 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8521 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8522 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8523 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8524 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8525 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8526 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8527
8528 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8529 control the linker:
8530
8531 @cindex Xtensa options
8532 @table @option
8533 @item --size-opt
8534 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8535 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8536 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8537 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8538 preserve the correctness of the code.
8539 @end table
8540
8541 @ifclear GENERIC
8542 @lowersections
8543 @end ifclear
8544 @end ifset
8545
8546 @ifclear SingleFormat
8547 @node BFD
8548 @chapter BFD
8549
8550 @cindex back end
8551 @cindex object file management
8552 @cindex object formats available
8553 @kindex objdump -i
8554 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8555 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8556 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8557 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8558 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8559 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8560 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8561 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8562 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8563
8564 @cindex BFD requirements
8565 @cindex requirements for BFD
8566 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8567 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8568 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8569 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8570 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8571 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8572 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8573
8574 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8575 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8576 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8577 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8578
8579 @menu
8580 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8581 @end menu
8582
8583 @node BFD outline
8584 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8585 @cindex opening object files
8586 @include bfdsumm.texi
8587 @end ifclear
8588
8589 @node Reporting Bugs
8590 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8591 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8592 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8593
8594 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8595
8596 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8597 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8598 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8599 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8600 @command{ld}.
8601
8602 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8603 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8604
8605 @menu
8606 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8607 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8608 @end menu
8609
8610 @node Bug Criteria
8611 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8612 @cindex bug criteria
8613
8614 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8615
8616 @itemize @bullet
8617 @cindex fatal signal
8618 @cindex linker crash
8619 @cindex crash of linker
8620 @item
8621 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8622 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8623
8624 @cindex error on valid input
8625 @item
8626 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8627
8628 @cindex invalid input
8629 @item
8630 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8631 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8632 object files are correct.
8633
8634 @item
8635 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8636 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8637 @end itemize
8638
8639 @node Bug Reporting
8640 @section How to Report Bugs
8641 @cindex bug reports
8642 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8643
8644 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8645 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8646 recommend you contact that organization first.
8647
8648 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8649 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8650 distribution.
8651
8652 @ifset BUGURL
8653 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8654 @value{BUGURL}.
8655 @end ifset
8656
8657 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8658 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8659 fact or leave it out, state it!
8660
8661 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8662 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8663 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8664 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8665 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8666 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8667 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8668 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8669 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8670 and the most helpful.
8671
8672 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8673 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8674 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8675
8676 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8677 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8678 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8679 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8680
8681 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8682
8683 @itemize @bullet
8684 @item
8685 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8686 the @samp{--version} argument.
8687
8688 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8689 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8690
8691 @item
8692 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8693 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8694
8695 @item
8696 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8697 version number.
8698
8699 @item
8700 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8701 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8702
8703 @item
8704 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8705 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8706 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8707 sufficient.
8708
8709 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8710 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8711
8712 @item
8713 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8714 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8715 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8716 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8717 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8718 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8719 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8720 attachments are best.
8721
8722 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8723 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8724 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8725 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8726 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8727
8728 @item
8729 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8730 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8731
8732 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8733 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8734 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8735 a chance to make a mistake.
8736
8737 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8738 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8739 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8740 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8741 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8742 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8743 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8744 any conclusion from our observations.
8745
8746 @item
8747 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8748 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8749 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8750 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8751 context, not by line number.
8752
8753 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8754 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8755 @end itemize
8756
8757 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8758
8759 @itemize @bullet
8760 @item
8761 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8762
8763 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8764 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8765 changes will not affect it.
8766
8767 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8768 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8769 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8770 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8771
8772 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8773 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8774 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8775 less time, and so on.
8776
8777 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8778 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8779
8780 @item
8781 A patch for the bug.
8782
8783 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8784 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8785 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8786 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8787
8788 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8789 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8790 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8791 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8792 fixed.
8793
8794 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8795 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8796 help us to understand.
8797
8798 @item
8799 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8800
8801 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8802 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8803 @end itemize
8804
8805 @node MRI
8806 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8807 @cindex MRI compatibility
8808 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8809 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8810 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8811 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8812 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8813 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8814 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8815
8816 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8817 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8818 features to make use of them.
8819
8820 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8821 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8822
8823 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8824 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8825 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8826 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8827 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8828
8829 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8830
8831 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8832 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8833 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8834
8835 @table @code
8836 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8837 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8838 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8839 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8840 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8841 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8842 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8843 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8844 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8845 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8846 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8847
8848 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8849 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8850 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8851 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8852
8853 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8854
8855 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8856 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8857 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8858 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8859
8860 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8861 @item BASE @var{expression}
8862 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8863 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8864
8865 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8866 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8867 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8868 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8869
8870 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8871 @item END
8872 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8873
8874 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8875 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8876 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8877 language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8878
8879 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8880 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8881 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8882 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8883
8884 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8885 same line, with no change in its effect.
8886
8887 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8888 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8889 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8890 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8891 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8892 command line.
8893
8894 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8895 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8896 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8897 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8898 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8899
8900 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8901 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8902 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8903 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8904 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8905 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8906 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8907 file, in the order specified.
8908
8909 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8910 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8911 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8912 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8913 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8914 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8915
8916 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8917 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8918 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8919 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8920 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8921 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8922 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8923 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8924 @end table
8925
8926 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8927 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8928 @include fdl.texi
8929
8930 @node LD Index
8931 @unnumbered LD Index
8932
8933 @printindex cp
8934
8935 @tex
8936 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8937 % meantime:
8938 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8939 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8940 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8941 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8942 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8943 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8944 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8945 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8946 \page\colophon
8947 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8948 @end tex
8949
8950 @bye
This page took 0.331167 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.